2009 Pontiac Torrent Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
{ CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
. : Fuel Gage
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Fog Lamps
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
Front Seats
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat Height Adjuster
Power Seat
To manually raise or lower the seat, move the lever
repeatedly upward or downward
To adjust the seat:
• Slide the control forward or rearward to move the
seat forward or rearward.
• Move the front and rear of the control up or down to
raise or lower the front and rear part of the seat
cushion.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Lumbar
Heated Seats
On vehicles with this
feature, the knob is
located on the front of the
driver seat lower cushion
on the inboard side.
If your vehicle has heated
seats, the switches are
located on the instrument
panel near the climate
controls.
The ignition must be on for the heated seats to operate.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the lumbar support.
Press the switch, nearest to the seat, once to turn the
heated seat on to the high setting. Both indicator lights
will be lit. Press the switch a second time to turn the
heated seat to the low setting. One indicator light will
be lit. Press the switch a third time to turn the heated
seat off.
If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and is started
using the remote keyless entry transmitter, the heated
seats may automatically turn on if it is cold outside. See
“Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry
inserted into the ignition and the ignition is turned to RUN,
the heated seat feature will turn off. To turn the heated
seats back on, press the desired button.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Driver’s Seat shown, Passenger Seat similar
{ CAUTION:
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever on the outboard
side of the seat and move the seatback to the desired
position. Then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place. If the passenger’s seat is a flat folding
seat, fully raise the lever to disengage the seatback.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even if when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do their job when
reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the head restraint up to
raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button,
located on the top of the
seatback, and push the
restraint down.
Head Restraints
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On vehicles with this feature, to fold the seatback:
1. Lower the head restraint all the way.
Passenger Folding Seatback
2. Lift the bar under the front of the seat to unlock it.
Slide the seat as far back as it will go and release
the bar. Try to move the seat back and forth to
make sure it is locked into place.
{ CAUTION:
If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer
objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo is
not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating airbag
might force that object toward a person. This could
cause severe injury or even death. Secure objects
away from the area in which an airbag would
inflate. For more information, see Where Are the
on page 4-20.
{ CAUTION:
Things you put on this seatback can strike and
injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a
crash. Remove or secure all items before driving.
3. Lift up fully on the recliner lever, located on the
outboard side of the seat, and fold the seatback
forward until it disengages.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To raise the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift up fully on the recliner lever, located on the
outboard side of the seat, and push up on the
seatback.
2. Continue raising the seatback until the seatback
re-engages.
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
4. Continue to fold the seat forward until it locks in the
folded position.
5. Pull up on the seatback to be sure it is locked.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked in place.
The recliner lever is also used to recline the seatback
while a passenger is seated. See Manual Reclining
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seats
{ CAUTION:
Split Folding Rear Seat
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
The rear split bench seatbacks have three available
positions — folded forward, upright, or partially reclined.
Both of the seatbacks can be moved to any of the
three positions independent of the other seatback
position. The rear bench seat can also be moved
forward and rearward.
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To fold the seatback down, do the following:
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift and hold the lever located on top of the
seatback.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
2. Tilt the seatback rearward, then release the lever
when the seatback is in the desired position.
To slide the entire seat forward or rearward, do the
following:
1. Ensure all three of the safety belts are unbuckled
and the front seatbacks are not reclined.
1. Lift and hold the release bar located under the front
of the seat cushion to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position.
3. Release the bar.
4. Try to move the seat back and forth to ensure the
seat is locked in place.
2. Lift the lever located on the top of the seatback to
release the seatback.
3. Fold the seatback forward to the desired position.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
for additional information.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This section is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal organs like your
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instructions on use and important safety
information.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
For outboard seating positions, slide the latch plate
up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt is not in
use. The latch plate should rest on the stitching on
the safety belt, near the guide loop.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the
vehicle.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger seating positions.
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
Squeeze the release
buttons (A) together and
move the height adjuster to
the desired position.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
After the height adjuster is set to the desired position,
try to move it up or down without squeezing the release
buttons to make sure it has locked into position.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the back
of the seatback.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide back onto its
storage clip located on the seatback.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety Belt Extender
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
If the safety belt will fasten around you, you should
use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
• If you have the choice, a child should sit in a
position with a lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{ CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It
should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor
its airbag system is designed for them. Every time
infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should
have the protection provided by appropriate child
restraints.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
additional information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Configurations for Use of Child
Restraints
A. Child restraint using
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
LATCH
B. Occupant prohibited
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
A. Occupant prohibited
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
If you need to secure more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, review the following illustrations. Depending on
where you place the child restraint or the size of the child
restraint, you may not be able to access certain safety
belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional
passengers or child restraints.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Child restraint using
LATCH
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
B. Occupant prohibited
C. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
Rear Seat
Each rear seating position has exposed metal anchors
located in the crease between the seatback and the
seat cushion.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
information.
The top tether anchors for each rear seating position
are located on the back of the rear seatback. You may
need to adjust the rear compartment storage
panel/cover in the rear cargo area to access the
anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating position where the
child restraint will be placed.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchoror attachment to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be injured.
To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one child restraint per
anchor.
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure
the restraint, following the instructions that came
with the child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts
to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
A. Passenger’s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
B. Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors
C. Driver’s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the
seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper
anchor location.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system is designed to make installation of child
restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use
the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead use the vehicle’s
anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the
restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
2.2. You may need to adjust the rear
compartment storage panel/cover in the rear
cargo area to access the anchors. See
page 2-42.
2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
raise the headrest or head
restraint and route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and in
between the headrest or
head restraint posts.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
dual tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in
the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this
vehicle.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using
a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
information.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
including important safety information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
CAUTION: (Continued)
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the
page 3-29.
additional information.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
page 1-44 for how and where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
top tether anchor locations.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and your
child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
information.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
page 1-66 for more information.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety
belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
{ CAUTION:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag. In a crash,
an inflating airbag might force that object toward a
person. This could cause severe injury or even
death. Secure objects away from the area in which
an airbag would inflate. For more information, see
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may have the following airbags:
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind that
passenger.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Even if you do not have a right front passenger seat in
your vehicle there is still an active frontal airbag in
the right side of the instrument panel. Do not place cargo
in front of this airbag.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.
In some crashes safety belts are your only
page 1-63.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
roof-rail airbags.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
{ CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint system
can provide. Always secure children properly in
page 1-35.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags.
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover. Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the
crash severity is above the system’s designed threshold
level. The threshold level can vary with specific
vehicle design.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object does not deform.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, or rear impacts. Both
roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side of
the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts
that the vehicle is about to roll over.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity of
the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by
safety belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the
airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help contain the head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the first and second rows.
The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can prevent all such
ejections.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the
ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows that have
occupant seating positions.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{ CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some
components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If
you have breathing problems but cannot get out of
the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh
air by opening a window or a door. If you
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the
hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and
turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is started.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. The
driver airbags are not affected by the passenger sensing
system.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback
and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to
make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing
the child restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-7.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child restraint
in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check
with your dealer/retailer.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-16.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for
your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
{ CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing
system. This could either prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
If you have any questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors, rollover sensor
module, or airbag wiring can affect the operation of
the airbag system.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
additional important information.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this
will affect my airbag system?
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat.
The passenger sensing system may not operate
properly if the original seat trim is replaced with
non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-28 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are
any opened or broken airbag covers, have the
airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For
the location of the airbag modules, see What
dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, check the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was
not being used at the time of the crash.
{ CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
page 7-7 for more information.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
If this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too
far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left
or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly,
see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
for service.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors and liftgate.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the parking lamps flash once to indicate locking has
occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn chirps
information.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote
Pressing Q may arm the content theft-deterrent system.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.
If K is pressed again within five seconds, all remaining
doors and the liftgate unlock. The interior lamps
come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition
is turned on. If enabled through the DIC, the parking
lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the content
theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-16.
With Remote Start
Shown, Without Remote
Start Similar
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and
the horn sounds three times.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press to start the engine from outside the vehicle
page 2-6 for additional information.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash and
the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm
turns off when the ignition is moved to ON/RUN or L is
pressed again. The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for the
panic alarm to work.
Battery Replacement
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
The RKE transmitter is used to arm/disarm the
content theft-deterrent system. The theft-deterrent
system can be programmed to three different modes.
If you accidentally set off the alarm when entering or
exiting the vehicle, press Q or K once or L twice
to turn it off.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters
no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to four transmitters
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
programmed to it. See “Learn Remote Key” under
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while
the vehicle is running.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have the remote start feature.
This feature allows you to start the engine from outside
the vehicle. See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
enable and disable this feature.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
information.
During a remote start, the climate control system will
turn on at the fan, temperature, and mode settings the
vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned
off. The rear window defogger will also turn on.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): This button will be on the
RKE transmitter if you have remote start.
If your vehicle has heated seats, they may turn on
during colder outside temperatures and will shut off
when the key is turned to ON/RUN. You may not notice
an increase in seat surface temperature until the seat is
occupied for a short period of time.
To start the engine using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the RKE transmitter, that has a remote vehicle
start button, at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button, then
immediately press and hold the remote vehicle start
button. Hold the remote start button until the vehicle’s
turn signal lamps flash, or for at least four seconds if
the vehicle’s lights are not visible. The vehicle’s
doors will be locked.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use
of remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
Pressing the remote start button again after the
vehicle has started will turn off the ignition.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, do not use the remote
start feature. The vehicle may run out of fuel.
When the vehicle’s engine starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on while the engine
is running.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. To extend the engine run time by 10 minutes,
repeat Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is still running.
The engine run time can only be extended if it is the
first remote start since the vehicle has been driven.
Remote start can be extended one time.
A maximum of two remote starts or remote start
attempts are allowed between ignition cycles.
After your vehicle’s engine has been started two times
using the remote start button, the vehicle’s ignition switch
must be turned to ON/RUN and then back to LOCK/OFF
using the key before the remote start procedure can be
used again.
If the remote start procedure is used again before
the first 10 minute time frame has ended, the first
10 minutes will immediately expire and the second
10 minute time frame will start.
To manually shut off the engine after a remote start, do
any of the following:
For example, if the lock button and then the remote
start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle
has been running for five minutes, 10 minutes are
added, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
4. After entering the vehicle during a remote start,
insert and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the
vehicle.
• Insert the vehicle’s key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to ON/RUN and then back
to LOCK/OFF.
After a remote start, the engine will automatically
shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension
has been done or the vehicle’s key is inserted into
the ignition switch and turned to ON/RUN.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the following occur:
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature.
This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
• The vehicle’s hood, liftgate or doors are not closed.
• The hazard warning flashers are on.
• There is an emission control system malfunction.
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature,
your RKE transmitter will have extended range that
will allow you to lock or unlock your vehicle from
approximately 195 feet (60 m) away.
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.
• Two remote vehicle starts have already been used.
The maximum number of remote starts or remote
start attempts between ignition cycles with the
key is two.
• The remote start feature may be disabled.
The system may be enabled or disabled through
the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
information.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle start
system enabled.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To lock or unlock a door, use the key from the outside
or the door lock from the inside.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the
driver’s and front passenger’s doors.
{ CAUTION:
K (Unlock): To unlock the doors, press the unlock
symbol.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear safety
belts properly and lock the doors whenever
you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
Q (Lock): Remove the key and press the lock symbol
to lock all of the doors.
Delayed Locking
A chime will sound three times to indicate a door or
liftgate is open when you try to lock the doors with the
power door lock switch. The doors will not lock, and the
theft-deterrent system will not arm until all the doors
are closed and ten seconds have passed.
The delayed locking feature can be programmed
through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
See also Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the security locks, do the following:
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
1. Insert the key into the lock above the rear door
security lock label and turn it to the horizontal
position.
Your vehicle has an automatic lock/unlock feature which
enables you to program the power door locks through
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
on DIC programming.
2. Close the door.
3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.
To open a rear door while the security lock is on, do the
following:
Rear Door Security Locks
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the front door power lock switch, or
the rear door manual lock.
Your vehicle has rear door security locks that prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
2. Open the door from the outside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each rear
door. You must open the
rear doors to access them.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the slot next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it to the vertical
position.
3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lockout Protection
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is
in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will lock
and only the driver’s door will unlock. Be sure to remove
the key from the ignition when locking your vehicle.
electrical wiring or other cable connections must
pass through the seal between the body and the
liftgate or liftglass:
If the keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the doors
and the key is in the ignition, a chime will sound three
times. All passenger doors will lock, but the driver’s door
will remain unlocked.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your climate control system to
its highest speed and select the control setting
that will force outside air into your vehicle.
See “Climate Control System” in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
Liftgate
{ CAUTION:
To unlock the liftgate, press the unlock button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice or use
the power door lock switch.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas
can come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. If you must drive with the liftgate open or if
To lock the liftgate, press the lock button on the
RKE transmitter or use the power door lock switch.
The liftgate does not have a key lock cylinder.
To open the liftgate, press the touchpad centered on
the underside of the liftgate handle and pull up.
CAUTION: (Continued)
When closing the liftgate, use the molded handles to
pull the liftgate down. Push the liftgate closed until
it latches.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a tool to push the
service release lever
located on the latch until
you hear or feel the gate
release.
Liftgate Operation with Loss of Power
The liftgate is equipped with an electric latch. If the
battery is disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate
will not open.
To open the liftgate if
this happens, remove the
interior trim plug located at
the base of the liftgate from
inside the vehicle.
The liftgate can now be opened and closed manually.
You will need to use this procedure to open the
liftgate until the power is restored.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
The window switches for all doors are located on the
center console. A window switch for each rear window
is located on each rear door.
To open or close a window press or pull the switch.
The power windows operate when the ignition is in
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or while in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). See Retained Accessory
on page 2-20.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Sun Visors
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature that allows the window to be lowered without
holding the switch. Press the bottom of the switch
part way, and the driver’s window will open a small
amount. Press the switch down all the way down and
release it and the window will go down automatically.
To block out glare, swing the sun visor down. You can
also detach the driver’s sun visor from the center mount
and slide it along the rod from side-to-side for greater
coverage.
Visor Vanity Mirrors
To stop the window while it is lowering, press and
release the top of the switch.
Your vehicle has covered visor vanity mirrors on both
the driver’s and passenger’s side.
Window Lockout
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
o (Window Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout
feature to prevent rear seat passengers from operating
the windows. Press the lockout button, located with
the power window switches, to turn the feature on and
off. The window switch has a light that will come on
when the switch is active.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Content Theft-Deterrent
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
Your vehicle has a content theft-deterrent alarm system.
To activate the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch
or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
If you are using the RKE transmitter, the door
does not need to be open.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
3. Close all doors.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The key must be removed from the ignition to arm
the system.
If the theft-deterrent system is activated and a door or
the liftgate is opened without using the RKE transmitter,
a 10 second pre-alarm will occur, and the security light
will flash. The horn will sound rapidly for 10 seconds.
If you do not press unlock on the RKE transmitter or
insert the key in the ignition and turn if from the LOCK/
OFF position, the alarm will go off. The horn will sound
and the headlamps will flash for 30 seconds.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
After the alarm has sounded for 30 seconds, the system
will re-arm itself automatically.
To disarm the theft-deterrent system, do one of the
following:
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
1. Unlock the doors with the RKE transmitter.
2. Insert the key in the ignition and turn it from the
LOCK/OFF position.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
If the engine does not start and the security light on
the instrument panel comes on when trying to start the
vehicle, there may be a problem with your theft-deterrent
system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you
may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
dealer/retailer who can service the PASS-Key® III+ to
have a new key made. In an emergency, contact
Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to “learn”
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to
nine additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost
or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key
is turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START
from the LOCK/OFF position.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
To program the new additional key:
New Vehicle Break-In
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer/retailer for service.
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast
or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn
it to the ON/RUN position within five seconds of
removing the original key.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition and
steering column, with the key removed. You will only be
able to remove the key when the ignition is turned to
LOCK/OFF.
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
The ignition switch cannot be turned to LOCK/OFF
unless the shift lever is in P (Park).
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right
to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
If this does not work, then the vehicle needs service.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the position in which
you can operate some electrical accessories.
R (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The switch
stays in this position when the engine is running. If you
leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position with the engine off, the battery could be drained.
You may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery is
allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
In order to shift out of P (Park), ignition must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake
pedal must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in
the ignition could cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is
all the way in, and turn it only with your hand.
If the key cannot be turned by hand, see your
dealer/retailer.
/ (START): This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting Procedure
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go of
the key. The idle speed will slow down as the engine
warms. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Sunroof (if equipped)
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also prevents cranking if the
engine is already running. Engine cranking can
be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
Power to these accessories will continue to operate for
up to 10 minutes or until the driver door is opened.
All these features will work when the key is in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY.
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).
The engine will not start in any other position.
To restart the engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each
try, to let the cranking motor cool down.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START
for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, repeat these steps. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms
up and lubricates all moving parts.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at
least four hours before starting. An internal thermostat
in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above
0°F (−18°C).
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check
with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
Automatic Transmission Operation
(3.4L V6 with 5-Speed)
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the passenger side of the
engine compartment, near the radiator.
The shift lever is located on the center console. When
you change gears, the different shift positions will display
on the instrument panel cluster.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{ CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a
properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
There are several different positions for the automatic
transmission.
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts, to prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged
in depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer
in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for
the best advice on this.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
apply the brake pedal and then press the shift lever
button before you can shift from P (Park) when the
ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift lever and push
the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as you maintain
brake application. Then press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out
{ CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If
page 4-19.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving with
the automatic transmission. It provides the best fuel
economy. If you need more power for passing, and
you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
{ CAUTION:
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the accelerator
all the way down.
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
I (Intermediate): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed without using
the brakes for slight downgrades where the vehicle
would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade.
If constant upshifting or downshifting occurs while
driving up steep hills, this position can be used to
prevent repetitive types of shifts. You might choose
I (Intermediate) instead of D (Drive) when driving
on hilly, winding roads and when towing a trailer,
so that there is less shifting between gears.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to a drive gear from NEUTRAL (N)
while the vehicle is moving could damage the
transmission. Make sure the vehicle is stopped
before shifting from NEUTRAL (N) into a drive gear.
L (Low): This position reduces vehicle speed more than
I (Intermediate) without actually using the brakes. You
can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the shift lever is placed in L (Low), the transmission
will not shift into L (Low) until the vehicle is going slowly
enough.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Automatic Transmission Operation
(3.6L V6 with 6-Speed)
The shift lever for the automatic transmission is located
on the console between the seats.
Maximum engine speed is limited when the vehicle is in
P (Park) or N (Neutral) to protect driveline components
from improper operation.
Transmission Overheating
If the transmission fluid temperature rises above
284°F (140°C) or rises rapidly, the Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light will flash. See Engine
more information. When the transmission overheats it
will go into a protection mode and will default shift into
fifth gear if in the D (Drive) position, or second gear if in
the L (Low) position. Continue driving the vehicle in either
position depending on the required vehicle speed and
load. Once the fluid temperature lowers to the normal
temperature range, the transmission will return to the
normal shift patterns. Towing or driving on long hills can
cause the transmission fluid temperature to be higher
than normal. If the transmission fluid temperature will
not cool, you may need to pull over and check the
transmission fluid level. You should also check the
engine coolant temperature. If it is hot, see Engine
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
When using the MSM (Manual Shift Mode), a number
indicating the gear selected will appear on the instrument
cluster below the shift position display. For more
information on the manual shift option see “Manual
Shift Mode” in this section.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is
the best position to use when the engine is started
because the vehicle cannot move easily.
apply the brake pedal and then press the shift lever
button, before you can shift from P (Park) when the
ignition is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of P (Park),
ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever
all way into P (Park) as you maintain brake application.
Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever
{ CAUTION:
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If
page 4-19.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If the vehicle needs more
power for passing, and it is:
{ CAUTION:
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down.
The vehicle will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see Skidding under Loss of
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
MSM (Manual Shift Mode): This position, available
on the models with the MSM (Manual Shift Mode),
allows you to change gears similar to a manual
transmission. If the vehicle has this feature, see
“MSM (Manual Shift Mode)”.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In manual shift mode all six forward gears can be
selected.
MSM (Manual Shift Mode)
While using the MSM (Manual Shift Mode) feature
the vehicle will have operation similar to a manual
transmission. You can use this for sport driving or
when driving hilly roads to stay in gear longer or
to downshift for more power or engine braking.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears
appropriate for the vehicle speed:
• The transmission will not automatically shift to the
next higher gear without moving the shift lever.
• The transmission will not allow shifting to the next
lower gear if the vehicle speed is too high.
To use this feature, do the following:
If the vehicle does not respond to a gear change, or
detects a problem with the transmission, the range
of gears may be reduced and the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp will come on. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-34.
1. Move the shift lever from D (Drive) to the left into
the manual gate.
While driving in manual shift mode, the transmission
will remain in the driver gear selected. When coming
to a stop in the manual position, the vehicle will
automatically shift to 1 (First) gear.
2. Push the shift lever forward toward the plus (+) to
upshift or rearward toward the minus (−) to downshift.
When using the MSM (Manual Shift Mode) the
number of the gear selected will appear on the
instrument cluster below the shift position display.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission Overheating
2 (Second) and 3 (Third) Gear Start
Feature
If the transmission fluid temperature rises above
270°F (132°C) or rises rapidly, the Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light will flash. See Engine
more information. When the transmission overheats it
will go into a protection mode and will default into a
different shift sequence to help cool the transmission
fluid. This shift sequence is the same for both D (Drive)
position and manual mode. Continue driving the vehicle
in either position depending on the required vehicle
speed and load. Once the fluid temperature lowers to the
normal temperature range, the transmission will return to
the normal shift patterns. Towing or driving on long hills
can cause the transmission fluid temperature to be higher
than normal. If the transmission fluid temperature will
not cool, you may need to pull over and check the
transmission fluid level. You should also check the
engine coolant temperature. If it is hot, see Engine
When accelerating the vehicle from a stop in snowy
and icy conditions, you may want to select 2 (Second)
and 3 (Third) gear. A higher gear, and light application of
the gas pedal, may allow you to gain more traction on
slippery surfaces.
With the MSM (Manual Shift Mode), the vehicle can
accelerate from a stop in 2 (Second) or 3 (Third).
1. Move the shift lever from D (Drive) into the
manual gate.
2. With the vehicle stopped, move the shift lever
forward to select 2 (Second) or 3 (Third).
The vehicle will start from a stop position
in 2 (Second) or 3 (Third).
3. Once the vehicle is moving select the desired
drive gear or move the shift lever to the D (Drive)
position.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on.
Parking Brake
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can
press the release button. Hold the release button in
as you move the brake lever all the way down.
Make sure to release the parking brake before driving
the vehicle.
If the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving
at least 4 mph (6 km/h), a chime will activate to remind
you to release the parking brake.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
The parking brake lever is located to the right of the
driver seat.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Shifting Into Park
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-33.
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if
the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with
the engine running, it could overheat and even
catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not
leave the vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking
brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you have
moved the shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from P (Park) without first pressing the
button on the console shift lever. If you can, it means
that the shift lever was not fully locked into P (Park).
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
information.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pressing the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the key, the vehicle is in
P (Park).
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The shift lock release is always functional except in
the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the
transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of P (Park). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the driver
page 2-31.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
To shift out of P (Park):
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
see your dealer/retailer.
Shifting Out of Park
The vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button
fully released, and
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park),
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
CAUTION: (Continued)
{ CAUTION:
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings in the
vehicle body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
Engine Exhaust
{ CAUTION:
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an
enclosed area such as a garage or a building that
has no fresh air ventilation.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
{ CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if
the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The
vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
and move the shift lever to P (Park).
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For more information,
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Power Mirrors
Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the instrument panel.
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view behind your vehicle.
Adjust the mirror to reduce the glare of headlamps from
behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull
it for nighttime use.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three control buttons
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move
it for a clearer view of behind your vehicle.
To adjust the mirrors:
Adjust the mirror to reduce the glare of headlamps
1. Move the selector switch to the left or right to
choose the driver or passenger mirror.
from behind you. Press AUTO or ( located in the lower
center of the mirror to turn automatic dimming on or off.
The indicator light comes on when this feature is on.
2. Press the corresponding edges of the round control
pad to move each mirror to the desired direction.
For vehicles with OnStar®, press the O located on the
lower part of the mirror, for up to six seconds to turn
automatic dimming on or off.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that you can see a
little of your vehicle, and the area behind your
vehicle.
Vehicles with OnStar® have control buttons located at
page 2-36 for more information.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
Outside Convex Mirrors
{ CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good
for 60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route,
is available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button
to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver’s seat.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until
the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the
first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly or
annual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan
is not selected, the OnStar system and all services,
including airbag notification and emergency services,
may be deactivated and no longer available. For more
information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada),
or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the
OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Virtual Advisor
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into the
vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid Minute
Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes good
for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be linked to
a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on eligibility.
To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, or
speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock
quotes. Press the phone button and give a few simple
voice commands to browse through the various topics.
See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information.
This feature is only available in the continental U.S.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
for more information.
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
How OnStar Service Works
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,
the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or
AACN system deploy. This information usually includes
the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle
was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide
services where it is located.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons
is red, the system may not be functioning properly.
Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press the OnStar
button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,
or at all times.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Luggage Carrier
Storage Areas
Glove Box
{ CAUTION:
To open the glove box, pull the handle to the left
and pull the glove box door down until it stops and
is fully open.
If something is carried on top of the vehicle that
is longer or wider than the luggage carrier — like
paneling, plywood, or a mattress— the wind can
catch it while the vehicle is being driven. This can
cause a driver to lose control. The item being
carried could be violently torn off, and this could
cause a collision, and damage the vehicle. Items
may be carried inside. Never carry something
longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top
of the vehicle.
Cupholders
Cupholders are located on the lower front of the center
console. Pull-out cupholders are located at the bottom
of the armrest and on the back of the rear seat center
console. Cupholders are also located on the rear seat
armrest.
Center Console Storage
If equipped, a luggage carrier allows you to load things
on top of your vehicle. The luggage carrier has side rails
attached to the roof, sliding crossrails, if the vehicle has
them, and places to use for tying things down. These let
you load some things on top of your vehicle, as long as
they are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.
Your vehicle has a center console armrest with storage
area. Use the lever on the front of the console to
open it.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The roof rack crossrails lock along the straight section
of the side rail.
Do not stand on the plastic lower body panels when
loading cargo on the luggage carrier.
Press the levers down until the locking mechanisms
fully engage to the side rail. Make sure each lever is
in the down position. The crossrail will not slide
when properly engaged.
Loading cargo on the luggage carrier will make the
center of vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt
maneuvers. This could result in loss of control of
the vehicle.
To move the crossrail, pull up on the end levers on
each side of the crossrail to the upright position. This will
release the locking mechanism from the siderail. Lift and
place the crossrail into the new position. Press the levers
down until the locking mechanisms fully engage to the
side rail. Make sure each lever is in the down position.
The crossrail will not slide when properly engaged.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
page 4-20.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier
crossrails are locked and cargo is still securely fastened.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 150 lbs (68 kg) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle.
When loading cargo, tie it to the crossrail and against
the siderail. Lock the crossrails to the far forward and
backward location to make sure the load is evenly
distributed on the luggage carrier.
When the luggage carrier is not in use, store the
crossrail inside the vehicle. If not possible, lock one
crossrail at the rear most position on the siderails and
lock the other crossrail above the opening of the rear
door to reduce wind noise.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Compartment Storage
Panel/Cover
Your vehicle may have an adjustable panel/cargo cover
feature. The panel/cargo cover can be adjusted into
three positions.
To use the panel in the lower position, do the following:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the
lower guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down on the back of the panel to lock it in
place.
The panel can be used in this position if you need
additional space above the panel. Place the cargo
on top of the panel in this position.
There is a flip panel towards the front of the cargo
cover. You may have to flip this panel upward in order
to gain access to the cargo cover.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The panel can be used in this position when you have
to place a flat or spare tire in the rear cargo area.
{ CAUTION:
To use the panel in the upper position, do the following:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the top
guides.
If you were to carry things on the adjustable panel
when it is in the upper (cargo cover) or center
positions, during a sudden vehicle movement or a
crash, those things could be thrown around in the
vehicle. You or others could be injured. When it is
in the upper or center position, always secure any
cargo on the floor beneath the panel/cover.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down and pull rearward on the back of the
panel to lock it in place.
This can be used as a cargo cover for the rear area.
The panel may be installed either carpet or plastic side
up. The panel may also be used as a table in this
To use the panel in the center position, do the following:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the
middle guides.
Rear Seat Armrest
Vehicles with a rear seat armrest, have two cupholders.
Pull the armrest down from the rear seatback to access
the cupholders.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down and pull rearward on the back of the
panel to lock it in place.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set up the table, do the following:
Table
1. With the adjustable panel in the upper position,
pull it rearward to position it for use as a table.
The plastic side should be up.
2. Turn the knob to release the leg from the plastic
side of the table and turn the leg outward.
3. Set the table leg onto the liftgate lock striker at the
rear edge of the vehicle.
Make sure to place the table leg securely onto the
liftgate lock striker.
Notice: Driving with the panel extended into the
table position could damage your vehicle. Always
have the panel in the stored position while you
are driving.
Notice: Placing hot items on the surface of the
table could damage it. Always be sure that the items
that are placed on the surface of the table are of
moderate temperature.
Your vehicle may have an adjustable panel that also
functions as a table. The maximum load for the table
is 100 lbs. distributed (45 kg).
There are four hooks located on the table that can be
used for grocery bags.
Convenience Net
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store
small loads as far forward as possible. The net should not
be used to store heavy loads.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To stop the sunroof before it is completely open, press
the switch rearward again. The sunshade cannot be
closed with the sunroof open.
Sunroof
If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, the controls
to operate it are located on the headliner above the
rearview mirror. The ignition must be in RUN/ON or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
must be active, to operate the sunroof. See Retained
information.
To close the sunroof, press forward and hold the switch
until the sunroof stops, lifts and seals at the back of
the sunroof glass. Press forward on the switch again,
to make sure the sunroof is fully closed.
To put the sunroof in the vent position, pull down on the
front of the switch. Push up on the front of the switch
to close it.
To express-open the
sunroof glass panel and
sunshade, press the switch
rearward and release it.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
on page 1-4 (If Equipped).
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press | again to turn the flashers off.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
The tilt lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
The vehicle has a tilt wheel that lets the steering wheel
be adjusted.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and push the
lever down. Then, move the steering wheel to a
comfortable position and pull the lever up firmly to lock
the column in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
Raise or lower the lever until the indicator arrow on the
instrument panel starts to flash to signal a lane change.
Hold it there until the lane change is completed. The lever
will return by itself when it is released.
G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers will not see your turn signal.
5 3: Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
O : Exterior Lamp Control
Flash-to-Pass.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
Information for these features is on the pages following.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high,
push the turn signal lever away from you. To change
from high beam to low beam, pull the turn signal
lever towards you. To flash the high beams from low
beam, pull the turn signal lever all the way towards you.
Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
will also be on.
The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of
the steering column.
Move the lever to the following positions:
Flash-to-Pass
1 (High Speed): For steady wiping at high speed.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.
& (Delay): Sets a delay between wipes.
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To flash the high beams from low beam, pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever all the way towards you.
Then release it.
6 (Delay Adjustment): Move the lever to the delay
position to choose a delayed wiping cycle. Turn
the intermittent adjust band down for a longer delay or
up for a shorter delay.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 (Off): Turns off the windshield wipers.
Windshield Washer
8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down to mist and
release for a single wiping cycle. The windshield wipers
stop after one wipe and the lever returns to its starting
position. Hold the lever on mist longer for more wipes.
{ CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If they are frozen to the windshield, gently
loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become damaged,
install new blades or blade inserts. See Windshield
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
There is a button marked with the windshield washer
symbol at the end of the windshield wiper lever.
Press this button to spray washer fluid on the
windshield. The wipers will run for a few cycles to clear
the window and then either stop or return to your
preset speed. For more wash cycles, press and hold the
button longer.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Cruise Control
The rear wiper and rear wash buttons are located on
the instrument panel above the audio system.
Cruise control lets a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more be maintained without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the rear wiper on and
off. When the wiper is on it runs intermittently at a preset
speed.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control automatically disengages. See Traction
conditions allow, the cruise control can be used again.
Y (Wash): Press to spray washer fluid on the rear
window. The window wiper will also come on. Release
the button when enough fluid has been sprayed on
the window. The rear wiper will run a few more cycles
after it is released. If the rear wiper function was already
on, prior to pressing the wash button, it stays on until
the wiper button is pressed again.
{ CAUTION:
The rear window washer uses the same fluid that is in
the windshield washer reservoir. See Windshield
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot
drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the
cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
I (On/Off): Press I to turn the cruise control
system on and off.
RES+ (Resume): Press to resume a set speed and to
accelerate the speed.
{ CAUTION:
SET− (Set): Press to set a speed and to decrease the
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
speed.
[ CANCEL: Press to cancel cruise control.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press I to turn cruise control on. The indicator
light on the button comes on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the steering
wheel.
3. Press the SET− and release it. This instrument
panel cluster light J comes on after the system
is engaged.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control is at a set speed and the brakes are
applied, this disengages the cruise control. The
If the cruise control system is already engaged:
instrument panel cluster light J also goes out,
indicating cruise is no longer engaged. To return to the
previously set speed, it does not need to be reset.
• Push and hold the SET− until the desired lower
speed is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in small amounts, briefly press SET−.
Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Once the vehicle is at a speed of about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more, briefly press RES+. The vehicle
goes back to the previous set speed and stays there.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to the cruise control speed that was
set earlier.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
• If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press and hold the RES+ button until the desired
speed is reached, then release it.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
• To increase the vehicle speed in small amounts,
briefly press the RES+ and then release it. Each
time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle at a
lower speed. However, when the brakes are applied the
cruise control turns off.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The exterior lamp control has the following positions:
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
AUTO (Off/Automatic Headlamps): Automatic
mode turns the exterior lamps on and off depending
upon how much light is available outside of the vehicle.
• Press the I button, to turn off the cruise control
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps
system.
together with the following:
• Press the [ button.
When cruise control disengages, the cruise symbol
in the instrument panel cluster goes out.
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
5 3 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, together
with the previously listed lamps and lights.
Headlamps
The exterior lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the exterior lamp band is turned to the
headlamp position, the low-beam headlamps come on.
The other lamps that come on with the headlamps will
also come on.
Headlamps on Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off and the
lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
When the headlamps are turned off, the regular lamps
will go off, and the low-beam headlamps come on
to the reduced brightness.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. Fully functional Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) are
required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, move the shift
lever to P (Park). The DRL will stay off until the
shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) position.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
The DRL system will make the low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness in daylight when
the following conditions are met:
Automatic Headlamp System
• The ignition is on.
When it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamps
control is in the automatic position, the headlamps
• The exterior lamp band is in the automatic position.
• The transmission is not in P (Park).
• The light sensor determines it is daytime.
• The parking brake is released.
The vehicle has a light sensor located on top of the
instrument panel. Make sure it is not covered, or
the headlamps will be on when they are not needed.
When the DRL are on, the low-beam headlamps will be
on at a reduced brightness. The taillamps, sidemarker,
instrument panel lights and other lamps will not be on.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage or tunnel.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
Use the fog lamps for better visibility in foggy or misty
conditions.
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
The fog lamps button is located on the instrument panel
above the radio.
The control for this feature
is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering column.
The parking lamps or low-beam headlamps must be on
to use the fog lamps.
# : Press to turn the fog lamps on or off.
The fog lamp button is lit when the lamps are on. The fog
lamps will go off whenever the high-beam headlamps are
turned on. When the high-beam headlamps are turned
off, the fog lamps will come on again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
Turn the control up to brighten the lights or down to
dim them.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamp
Map Lamps
For vehicles with a dome lamp, move the lever to
change the setting.
9 (Off): Turns the lamp off, even when a door is open.
1 (Door): The lamp comes on automatically when a
door is opened.
+ (On): Turns the dome lamp on.
Entry Lighting
The dome lamp and the cargo lamp inside the vehicle
comes on when any door is opened, if the dome lamp is
in the door position. In addition, these lamps come on
when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) unlock button is
pressed. It stays on for 20 seconds or until a door is
opened. After the door is opened and then closed, the
light remains on for 20 seconds, or until the key is
put in the ignition and turned to the ON/RUN position.
The vehicle may have lamps located on the headliner
above the rearview mirror. Push on the lens in the lamp
to turn them on and off.
Cargo Lamp
The cargo lamp is located over the rear compartment,
page 3-16.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of
some accessories.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move
up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an
alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
Battery Run-Down Protection
The vehicle has a battery saver feature designed to
protect the vehicle’s battery.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system will
automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes. This will
avoid draining the battery. This vehicle also has a
retained accessory power feature. If the radio is on, it
will turn off after 10 minutes or if any door on the vehicle
page 2-20.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
The two accessory power outlets are located in the front
and at the rear of the center console storage area.
To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not in use,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Notice: If electrical devices are left plugged into a
power outlet, the battery may drain causing the
vehicle not to start or damage to the battery. This
would not be covered by the warranty. Always
unplug all electrical devices when turning off the
vehicle.
For vehicles with a removable ashtray and cigarette
lighter, the ashtray can be placed into the front console
cupholders.
To use the lighter, push it in all the way and let go.
When it is ready, it pops back out by itself.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlets and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the accessory power outlet.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
15 amperes.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are
put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage the
vehicle. Never put flammable items in the ashtray.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the fan speed. To turn the fan off,
turn the fan knob all the way counterclockwise. In any
setting other than off, the fan runs continuously with the
ignition on. The fan must be turned on to run the air
conditioning compressor. There will be some airflow
noticeable from the various outlets when driving, even
with the fan in the off position. This is so fresh air is
always available in the vehicle. To turn off the air
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with this system. For vehicles with the
remote start feature, the climate control system functions
as part of the remote start feature. See Remote
completely, turn the fan to 9 and select the recirculation
button.
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow
inside the vehicle.
There is one position between each mode to finely
adjust airflow position.
Select from the following modes:
A. Fan Control
B. Outside Air
C. Temperature
Control
D. Recirculation
E. Air Delivery Mode
Control
F. Air Conditioning
G. Heated Seats
H. Rear Window
Defogger
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel outlets and the floor outlets.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets with
Air Conditioning
some air directed to the windshield.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show
that the air conditioning is on. The air conditioning
can be selected in any mode as long as the fan is on
and the outside temperature is above freezing. A
flashing indicator light indicates that the air conditioning
compressor is currently not available.
When this mode is selected, the system turns the
recirculation mode off. Recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in floor mode. This helps to prevent
window fogging.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, side window
outlets, and floor outlets. In this mode, the system
turns the recirculation mode off and runs the air
conditioning compressor unless the outside air is at or
below freezing. Recirculation mode cannot be selected
while in defog mode. This helps prevent window
fogging. To defog the windows faster, turn the
temperature knob clockwise to the warmest setting.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, select the following
settings together:
1. Select H mode.
2. Select ; .
0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield,
with some air directed to the side window outlets and the
floor outlets. In this mode, the system turns the
recirculation mode off and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside air is at or below freezing.
Recirculation mode cannot be selected while in defrost
mode. This helps prevent window fogging. To defrost the
windows faster, turn the temperature knob clockwise to
the warmest setting.
3. Turn the # on.
4. Select the coolest temperature and highest fan
speed.
5. Once the vehicle’s interior temperature is below the
outside temperature, select recirculation mode for
enhanced cooling.
For best results, clear all snow and ice from the
windshield before defrosting.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of the vehicle to become
too dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air
inside of the vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation
mode off.
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on. An indicator light comes on to show
recirculation is on. The air inside the vehicle will be
recirculated through the climate control system and the
vehicle, not from outside the vehicle. It can be used
to prevent outside air and odors from entering the
vehicle or to help cool the air inside the vehicle more
quickly. Avoid using the recirculation mode during
high periods of humidity and cool outside temperatures
since this may result in increased window fogging. If
window fogging is experienced, select the defrost mode.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
; (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode
on. An indicator light comes on to show that outside
air is on. Air from outside the vehicle will circulate
throughout the vehicle. The outside air mode can be
used with all modes, but it cannot be used with
Recirculation mode is not available in floor, defog or
defrost modes and will shut off automatically and change
to outside air. If the button is selected in these modes,
the indicator will flash. This helps prevent window
fogging and moisture building up within the cabin.
the recirculation mode. Pressing ; will cancel the
recirculation mode.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For vehicles with the remote start feature, the rear
defogger will automatically turn on. See Remote Keyless
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
The rear window defogger only works when the ignition
is in ON/RUN.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. An indicator light comes
on to show that the rear window defogger is on.
( (Heated Seats): For vehicles with heated seats,
The rear window defogger stays on for about 10 minutes
if the vehicle remains at slower vehicle speeds, or
until the button is pressed or the ignition is turned to
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. If turned on again,
the defogger only runs for about five minutes before
turning off again. At higher vehicle speeds, the defogger
may stay on continuously. The defogger can also be
turned off by turning off the engine.
Remote Start Climate Control Operation
For vehicles with the remote start feature activated, the
climate control system heats and cools the inside of
the vehicle using the modes that were set before
the vehicle was turned off. The rear defogger will also
automatically turn on. If the vehicle has heated
seats, they may turn on if it is cold outside and will shut
off when the key is turned to ON/RUN. See Heated
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
Outlet Adjustment
Use the louvers located on the air outlets to change the
direction of the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the vehicle that may block
the flow of air into the vehicle.
• Do not use any non-GM approved hood deflectors
that could adversely affect the performance of the
system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
1. The passenger’s side air inlet panel is located
below the center of the passenger’s side wiper
blade. Remove the push pin retaining the air inlet
panel. Pry the center of the push pin out 0.5 in
(13 mm) for removal.
Outside air is routed through a passenger compartment
air filter before entering the vehicle. This filter removes
certain particles from the air, including pollen and
dust particles. Reductions in airflow, which may occur
more quickly in dusty areas, indicate that the filter needs
to be replaced early.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the three push pins from the top and
forward edge of the passenger’s side air inlet
panel.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for when to replace the filter.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Remove the air inlet panel to access the filter.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
5. Press the release tab on the driver’s side of the filter
and pull out the edge of the filter.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
may be a problem, check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
6. Remove the filter from the vehicle.
7. Install a new passenger compartment air filter. For
the type of filter to use see Maintenance
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 5.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drive safely and economically.
United States version shown, Canada and GXP Model similar
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your trip odometer is located in the Driver Information
Center and shows how far your vehicle has been driven
since the trip odometer was last reset. For more
page 3-43.
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The
digital odometer will read 999,999 if someone tries to
turn it back.
Tachometer
The tachometer shows your engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. If
not, then it is set at zero and a label must be put on
the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when
the new odometer was installed.
Notice: If the engine is operated with the tachometer
in the solid red area, the vehicle could be damaged.
The damages would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not operate the engine in the solid
red area.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminders
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
sounds for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs if
the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and
then flashes for several more.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light comes
on and stays on for
several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle
the safety belt
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{ CAUTION:
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds
when you start the engine. If the light does not come on
then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a problem with
the airbag system, an airbag Driver Information Center
(DIC) message may also come on. See DIC Warnings
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
important safety information. The instrument panel has
a passenger airbag status indicator.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator will
light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to
let you know the status of the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If this light comes on while
you are driving, you may
have a problem with
the charging system.
If the brake system warning light comes on, there is a
brake problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
A charging system Driver Information Center (DIC)
message may also appear. See DIC Warnings
light could indicate that you have problems with a
generator drive belt, or another electrical problem. Have
it checked right away. If you must drive a short
distance with the light on, be certain to turn off all your
accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.
United States
Canada
The brake light is located in the instrument panel
cluster.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake light will come on
when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on
if your parking brake does not release fully. A chime
will also sound if the parking brake is not fully released
and the vehicle is moving. If it stays on after your
parking brake is fully released, it means you have a
brake problem.
{ CAUTION:
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
The brake light will also come on to indicate a low brake
information.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine
is started.
Your vehicle has a
Traction Control System
(TCS) and StabiliTrak®
warning light.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
When the traction control is activated the light will flash
when the TCS is limiting wheel spin or when the
StabiliTrak® system is active. You may feel or hear the
system working, but this is normal. This light may
also come on after extended heavy braking indicating
the brakes have become too hot to limit wheel spin.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is not
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also
on, the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and
there is a problem with the regular brakes. See Brake
This light will come on and stay on if the TCS is turned
off using the traction control on/off button, located
next to the gear shift lever.
If the TCS warning light comes on and stays on for an
extended period of time when the system is turned on,
your vehicle needs service. See Traction Control System
for more information.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
related DIC messages.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage measures the
temperature of the
vehicle’s engine coolant.
The engine coolant
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off the
page 5-29 for more information.
If the indicator needle moves towards the shaded in
thermostat, the engine is too hot. The engine coolant
temperature warning light will turn on. See Engine
more information.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause the vehicle to
vehicle’s engine could be damaged, and it might
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive
with the engine coolant temperature warning
light on.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, and the engine coolant temperature
warning light comes on, you should pull off the road,
stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon
as possible.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure light, this light
comes on briefly when the
engine is started and
provides information about
tire pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring
System.
This indicates that there could be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a
minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
for more information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
When the Light is On Steady
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It
ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate to the
information.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This
could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This
system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
• If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling after
start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed
into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or
stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Light
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
{ CAUTION:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection.
This can happen if the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has run down. The
diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during normal driving. This
can take several days of routine driving. If this
has been done and the vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness,
your dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The
engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it
does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other system
problem.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-16, and
Change Engine Oil Light
page 2-17.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps are
in use.
If this light comes on and stays on for 30 seconds, it
means that service is required for your vehicle.
A CHANGE OIL SOON message will appear on the
DIC. For more information see DIC Warnings and
After having the oil changed you will need to reset the
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
your vehicle. This may correct the condition. See
information.
Cruise Control Light
The cruise control light
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when
the reduced engine power light is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. The performance may
be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle. If
this light stays on, see your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible for diagnosis and repair.
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
Highbeam On Light
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
Reduced Engine Power Light
Your vehicle has a
reduced engine power
light.
for more information.
This light, along with the service vehicle soon light, will
be displayed when a noticeable reduction in the
vehicle’s performance may occur. Stop the vehicle and
turn off the ignition. Wait for 10 seconds and restart
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service All-Wheel Drive Light
All-Wheel Drive Disabled Light
This light is located in the
center of your instrument
panel cluster.
This light will come on
when the rear drive system
is overheating.
This light and the SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) will
come on and stay on to indicate that there may be a
problem with the drive system and service is required.
more information.
An ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF message will appear in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) too. This light will turn off
when the rear drive system cools down. If this light stays
on for a while, you need to reset the light. To reset the
light, turn the ignition off and then back on again. If the
light stays on, see your dealer/retailer right away.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gate Ajar Light
Service Vehicle Soon Light
If this light comes on, your
liftgate is not completely
closed. Driving with
the liftgate open can cause
carbon monoxide (CO)
to enter the vehicle.
This light, comes on if a
condition exists that
requires the vehicle to be
taken in for service.
If the light comes on, see your dealer/retailer for service
as soon as possible.
Door Ajar Light
Fuel Gage
This light will come on
when a door is open.
Before driving, check that
all doors are properly
closed.
When the ignition is on,
the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left in your tank.
When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light will
come on. You still have a little fuel left, but you
page 3-42 for more information.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
Low Fuel Warning Light
• At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
This light is located in the
fuel gage. For more
information see Fuel Gage
on page 3-41.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
When you add fuel the light should go off. If it does not,
have your vehicle serviced.
• The gage takes a few seconds to stabilize after the
ignition is turned on, and will go back to empty
when you turn the ignition off.
A “Fuel Level LOW” message also appears in the Driver
for more information.
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DIC also allows some features to be personalized.
more information.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
All messages will appear in the DIC display located in
the center of the instrument panel cluster. The DIC
buttons are located on the center of the instrument
panel.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the center
of the instrument panel.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
DIC Buttons
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected. The top of the DIC display shows the
shift lever position indicator. See Automatic
If your vehicle has these feature, the DIC also displays
the compass direction and the outside air temperature
when viewing the trip and fuel information. If there
is a problem with the system that controls the
temperature display, the numbers will be replaced with
dashes. If this occurs, have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer. If an abnormal temperature reading
is displayed for an extended period of time, consult
your dealer/retailer. Under certain circumstances,
especially when the engine is idling, a delay updating
the temperature display is normal.
The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle information, and
set/reset buttons. The button functions are detailed
in the following pages.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through the
trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel Menu Items”
following for more information on these displays.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRIP
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll
through the vehicle information displays and to
personalize the feature settings on your vehicle. See
“Vehicle Information Menu Items” following and
information on these displays.
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. This
display shows the current distance traveled in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the
trip odometer. This display will also show the outside
air temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
or degrees Celsius (°C).
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the
set/reset button while the trip odometer is displayed.
AVG (Average) SPD (Speed)
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG (Average) SPD
(Speed) displays. This display shows the average speed
of the vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers
per hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset
of this value. To reset the value, press and hold
the set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through
the following displays:
ODOMETER
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). This
display will also show the outside air temperature in
either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
AVG (Average) ECON (Economy)
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG (Average)
ECON (Economy) displays. This display shows the
approximate average miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number is calculated
based on the number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since
the last time this menu item was reset. To reset this
display, press and hold the set/reset button. The display
will return to zero.
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
see “UNITS” later in this section.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RANGE
Vehicle Information Menu Items
Press the trip/fuel button until RANGE displays. This
display shows the approximate number of remaining
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can be driven
without refueling.
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following displays:
OIL LIFE
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the
vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This
estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this display may read one number, but if
the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may
change even though the same amount of fuel is in the
fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions
produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy than city driving.
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display
along with the Change Engine Oil Light on the
instrument panel cluster. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL
You should change the oil as soon as possible. See
system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance
is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in
for more information.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will be displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”
for more information.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any
time other than when the oil has just been changed. It
cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for
service.
BATTERY
Press the vehicle information button until BATTERY
displays. This display shows the current battery voltage.
If the voltage is normal, the display will show NORMAL.
If the voltage is low or high, the display will show
LOW or HIGH. Your vehicle’s charging system regulates
voltage based on the state of the battery. The battery
voltage may fluctuate when viewing this information
on the DIC. This is normal. See Charging System Light
on page 3-30 for more information.
UNITS
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units.
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
the DIC will display SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM. See “SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
page 3-17 for more information.
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.
The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT
TIRES PSI (kPa) LF ## RF ##. Press the vehicle
information button again until the DIC displays REAR
TIRES PSI (kPa) LR ## RR ##.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to
check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the
information.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LEARN REMOTE KEY
CALIBRATE COMPAS (Compass)
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an RKE
transmitter to your vehicle:
Your vehicle may have this feature. The compass can
be manually calibrated. To calibrate the compass
1. Make sure the vehicle is in P (Park).
CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
2. Press the vehicle information button until LEARN
Your vehicle may have this feature. To change the
page 3-48.
REMOTE KEY PRESS V TO BEGIN displays.
3. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
Blank Display
4. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
This display shows no information.
FEATURE SETTNGS (Settings): PRESS V
TO SELCT (Select)
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
This display allows you to personalize the feature
settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
5. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
6. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Compass
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Compass Zone
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your
location.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state or
province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through the
DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the
compass is not set to the zone where you live, the
compass may give false readings. The compass must
be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is
traveling.
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park).
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading,
for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.
Press the vehicle information button until PRESS
V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle in
circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers, or
other industrial structures, if possible.
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is located. See “Compass
Variance (Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during
the calibration procedure.
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for example,
N for North, or the heading does not change after
making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna
mount, a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad
holder, or any other magnetic item. Turn off the
vehicle, move the magnetic item, then turn on the
vehicle and calibrate the compass.
2. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V
TO CALIBRATE COMPAS (Compass) displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVE
IN CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at
less than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the
calibration. The DIC will display CALIBRATION
COMPLETE for a few seconds when the calibration
is complete. The DIC display will then return to
the previous menu.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF
DIC Warnings and Messages
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system,
this message displays along with the All-Wheel
Drive Disabled light when the rear drive system is
overheating. This message turns off when the rear drive
system cools down. If the warning message stays on
for a while, you need to reset the warning message. To
reset the warning message, turn the ignition off and
then back on again. If the message stays on, see your
dealer/retailer right away. See All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
on page 3-40 for more information.
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press the set/reset button to acknowledge
that you received the messages and to clear them from
the display. Pressing any of the DIC buttons also
acknowledge and clear any messages.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared. You should
take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
CALIBRATION COMPLETE
This message displays when the charging system detects
that the battery is being drained. You may notice that the
vehicle attempts to reduce the drain for you by turning off
accessories, such as interior fans, rear defogger, and
heated seats. Turn off all accessories. If the vehicle is not
running, start and run the engine for at least 10 minutes
to allow the battery to recharge. If the engine is running
and the condition persists, see your dealer/retailer. See
information.
This message displays when the compass calibration is
information.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays and the Change Engine Oil Light
in the instrument panel cluster turns on when service
is required for the vehicle. See your dealer/retailer. See
for more information.
CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN CIRCLES
Acknowledging this message will not reset the OIL LIFE
REMAINING display. That must be done at the OIL
LIFE screen under the vehicle information menu. See
more information.
This message displays when calibrating the compass.
Drive the vehicle in circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h) to
page 3-48 for more information.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
ENGINE HOT A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
This message displays when the pressure in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRNT (Front), LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
which tire needs to be checked. You can receive
more than one tire pressure message at a time. To read
the other messages that may have been sent at the
same time, press the set/reset button. If a tire pressure
message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you
can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to those
shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See
also shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation
the low tire pressure warning light comes on. See
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal,
the A/C operation automatically resumes. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
ENGINE OVERHEATD (Overheated)
IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
page 5-29 for more information.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the driver door is not
closed properly. Close the door completely.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE OVRHEATD (Overheated)
STOP ENGINE
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and the Low Fuel Warning Light
in the instrument panel cluster comes on when your
vehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon
on page 5-8 for more information.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
for more information.
HOOD OPEN
This message displays along with a continuous chime
when the engine has overheated. Stop and turn the
engine off immediately to avoid severe engine damage.
This message displays on some vehicles when the
hood is not closed properly. Close the hood completely.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine power
is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to
your destination. The performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be
driven at a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to
your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
LIFTGATE OPEN
This message displays when the liftgate is not closed
page 2-11.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OIL PRSSURE (Pressure) LOW STOP
ENGINE
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “LEARN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Operation
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)
SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem
detected in the air conditioning system. Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light also appears
on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-28 for more information.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible when this message is displayed.
PASSENGER DOOR FRONT/
REAR OPEN
This message displays when one or more of the
passenger doors are not closed properly. Close the
doors completely.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system,
this message displays along with the service all-wheel
drive light if a problem occurs with this system. See
message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off
the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display. If the message is still
displayed or appears again when you begin driving, the
AWD system needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster when
this message appears on the DIC. See Brake System
serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
On some vehicles, this message displays when a
problem is detected with the power steering system.
When this message is displayed, you may notice
that the effort required to steer the vehicle increases or
feels heavier, but you will still be able to steer the
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with the
generator and battery charging systems. Driving with
this problem could drain the vehicle’s battery. Turn off all
unnecessary accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Have the electrical
system checked by your dealer/retailer immediately.
Connecting a battery charger to your vehicle while the
ignition is in any position other than LOCK/OFF may
cause this message to appear. If you need to charge
your vehicle, make sure that the key is in LOCK/OFF or
out of the ignition during charging.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
This message displays if there has been a problem
detected with the StabiliTrak® System. A warning light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. See
more information.
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
page 3-34. Several conditions may cause this message
page 5-63 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and
then back on. If this message still stays on or turns back
on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs
service. Have the StabiliTrak® System inspected by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is not functioning properly. A warning
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster. See
page 4-7 for more information. Have the TCS serviced
by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system. A fault has been detected in
the system which means that the system is disabled
and it is not protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usually
restarts; however, you may want to take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer before turning off the engine. See
page 2-17 for more information.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Any of the following conditions may cause the
StabiliTrak® System to turn off:
• The StabiliTrak® System is turned off by pressing
and holding the traction control button. See
information.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
STABILITRAK NOT READY
• The battery is low.
• There is a StabiliTrak® System failure. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
This message may display and a warning light on the
instrument panel cluster may be on after first driving the
vehicle and exceeding 30 mph (48 km/h) for 30 seconds.
page 3-32. The StabiliTrak® System is not functional
page 4-6 for more information.
STARTING DISABLD (Disabled)
SERVICE THRTTLE (Throttle)
This message displays if the starting of the engine is
disabled due to the electronic throttle control system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer
immediately.
STABILITRAK OFF
This message displays any time the StabiliTrak® System
turns off. When this message has been displayed,
StabiliTrak® is no longer available to assist you with
directional control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving
This message only appears while the ignition is in
ON/RUN, and will not disappear until the problem is
resolved.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Any of the following conditions may cause the TCS to
turn off:
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you were
away from your vehicle. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-16 for more information.
• The TCS is turned off by pressing the traction
control button. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-7 for more information.
• The battery is low.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
• There is a TCS failure. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on
your vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
information.
TRACTION CONTROL ON
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) turns on. See Traction Control System
TURN SIGNAL ON
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays as a reminder to turn off the turn
signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about
0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turn signal on. See Turn
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) turns off. See Traction Control System
This message displays and a chime sounds only when
the ignition is in ON/RUN. The message will not
disappear until the turn signal is manually turned off, or
a turn is completed.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN and disappears after 10 seconds, unless it is
acknowledged or an urgent warning appears.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the set/reset button to enter the feature
settings menu.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to one preferred
setting.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTNGS
(Settings): AVAILABLE IN PRK (Park) will
display. Before entering the menu, make sure the
vehicle is in P (Park).
All of the personalization options may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are personalization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
The default settings for the personalization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have been
changed from their default state since then.
DISPLAY ENGLISH
The personalization preferences are automatically
recalled.
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
To change personalization preferences, use the
following procedure.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
P (Park).
Press the vehicle information button until the PRESS V
TO DISPLAY ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button to display all
DIC messages in English.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the vehicle information button until FEATURE
SETTNGS (Settings): PRESS V TO SELCT
(Select) appears on the DIC display.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY LANG. (Language)
AUTO LOCK
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
information.
Press the vehicle information button until DISPLAY
LANG. (Language) appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the vehicle information button to
scroll through the following settings:
Press the vehicle information button until AUTO LOCK
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the vehicle information button to scroll through the
following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
OUT OF PARK (default): The vehicle’s doors
automatically lock when the doors are closed and the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.
SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.
AT SPEED: The vehicle’s doors automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h)
for three seconds.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO UNLOCK
REMOTE LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn
off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also
allows you to select which doors and when the doors
will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if any of the doors are open. See Remote
more information.
Press the vehicle information button until AUTO
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the vehicle information button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the vehicle information button to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the key is taken out of the ignition.
HORN/LIGHTS OFF: There will be no feedback when
you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.
HORN CHIRP ONLY: The horn will sound on the
second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
HORN/LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button
is pressed again within five seconds of the previous
command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
DELAY LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgate will be delayed.
When locking the doors and liftgate with the power
door lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open, this
feature will delay locking the doors and liftgate until
five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear
three chimes to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use. The key must be out of the ignition for
this feature to work. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch
twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter. You will not receive feedback when
unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the
doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the vehicle information button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the vehicle information button until DELAY
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the vehicle information button to scroll through the
following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
LOCK DELAY OFF: There will be no delayed locking
of the vehicle’s doors.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
LOCK DELAY ON (default): The doors will not lock
until five seconds after the last door or the liftgate
is closed.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXIT LIGHTNG (Lighting)
APPRCH (Approach) LIGHTNG (Lighting)
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the RKE
transmitter.
Press the vehicle information button until EXIT
LIGHTNG (Lighting) appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the vehicle information button to
scroll through the following settings:
Press the vehicle information button until APPRCH
(Approach) LIGHTNG (Lighting) appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset button to access the
settings for this feature. Then press the vehicle
information button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the
vehicle is no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry
information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHIME VOLUME
REMOTE START
This feature allows you to select the volume level of
the chime.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
page 2-6 for more information.
Press the vehicle information button until CHIME
VOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the vehicle information button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE
START appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the vehicle information button to scroll through the
following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal
level.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FACTORY SETTNGS (Settings)
FEATURE SETTNGS (Settings): PRESS V
TO EXIT
This feature allows you to set all of the personalization
features back to their factory default settings.
This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu.
Press the vehicle information button until FACTORY
SETTNGS (Settings) appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the vehicle information button to
scroll through the following settings:
Press the vehicle information button until FEATURE
SETTNGS (Settings): PRESS V TO EXIT appears in
the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to exit
the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing the vehicle information
button again will return you to the beginning of the
vehicle information menu.
RESTORE ALL (default): The personalization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The personalization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
• The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
• The trip/fuel DIC button is pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
{ CAUTION:
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With
RAP, the audio system can be played even after the
ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
Setting the Clock
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single CD
Player
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
If the vehicle has a AM/FM Base Radio with a Single
CD Player, it has a H button for setting the time.
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
To adjust the time:
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the H button until the hour begins flashing
page 4-2.
on the display. Press H a second time and the
minutes begin flashing on the display.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. While either the hour or the minutes are flashing,
do one of the following to increase or decrease
the time:
4. To increase the time or date, do one of the
following:
• Press the pushbutton below the selected tab.
• Press ¨ SEEK.
• Press \ FWD.
• Press ¨SEEK or ©SEEK.
• Press \ FWD or s REV.
• Turn f clockwise or counter-clockwise.
• Turn f clockwise.
4. Press H again until the clock display stops flashing
to set the currently displayed time; otherwise, the
flashing stops after five seconds and the current
time displayed is automatically set.
5. To decrease the time or date, do one of the
following:
• Press © SEEK.
• Press s REV.
MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a
Single CD and DVD Player
• Turn f counter-clockwise.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
If the vehicle has a radio with a single CD or a CD and
DVD player, it has a H button for setting the time
and date.
1. Press G and then the pushbutton located under the
forward arrow tab that displays on the radio screen
until the time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and
the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM (day
and month) displays.
To adjust the time and date:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press G to display HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year).
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired tab.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
tabs to be changed.
3. Press G again to apply the selected default, or
let the screen time out.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The date does not automatically display. To see
MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player
the date press MENU and then softkey below the H tab
while the radio is on. The date with display times out
after a few seconds and goes back to the normal radio
and time display.
If the vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, the
radio has a MENU button to set the time and date.
To set the time and date:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
ON/RUN, then press O, to turn the radio on.
2. Press MENU.
1. Press MENU, and then the pushbutton below the
3. Press the pushbutton below the H tab. The HR,
H tab. The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.
MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.
2. Press the pushbutton below the forward arrow tab.
The time 12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY
(month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,
month, and year) displays.
4. Press the pushbutton below any one of the tabs
you want to change.
5. To increase the time or date do one of the following:
3. Press the pushbutton located below the desired
option.
• Press the pushbutton located below the
selected tab.
4. Press MENU again to apply the selected default, or
let the screen time out.
• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.
• Turn f clockwise.
6. To decrease the time or date do one of the
following:
• Press ©SEEK or s REV.
• Turn f counterclockwise.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio(s)
Radio with CD and DVD (MP3)
Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Base Radio with CD
and Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat
information on the vehicle’s RSE system.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate.
The player can read the DTS programmed DVD
Audio or DVD Video media (DTS and DTS 2.0 are
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc.).
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
Dolby is manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The vehicle’s
audio system may also have Speed Compensated
Volume (SCV). While SCV is on, the radio volume
automatically adjusts to compensate for road and wind
noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down. That
way, the volume level should sound about the
same while driving. To activate SCV:
Radio Data System (RDS)
The vehicle’s audio system may have Radio Data
System (RDS). The RDS feature is available for use
only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and only works when the information
is available. While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS
station, the station name or call letters appear on
the display. In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast
incorrect information that causes the radio features to
work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio
station.
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) tab on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
If the radio does not have XM™, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM
(if equipped). The selection displays.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
© SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the previous
or to the next station and stay there.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a
few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep sounds.
When that pushbutton is pressed and released,
the station that was set, returns.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.
4 (Information) (Base Radio with CD): Press to switch
the display between the radio station frequency and the
time. When the ignition is off, press to display the time.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3/WMA, and RDS Features): Press to display
additional text information related to the current FM-RDS
or XM station, or MP3/WMA song. A choice of additional
information such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT
(category) can appear. Continue pressing to highlight the
desired tab, or press the pushbutton positioned under
any one of the tabs and the information about that tab
displays.
When information is not available, No Info displays.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to favorite
stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering
wheel controls, if the vehicle has them. See Defensive
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 tab.
If the radio has XM, a maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency tabs and
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency tabs and to begin the
process of programming favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
FAV (Favorites): Press the FAV button to go through up
to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations
available per page. Each page of favorites can contain
any combination of AM, FM, or XM (if equipped) stations.
To store a station as a favorite, perform the following
steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where the
station is to be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
to be stored as a favorite.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB tab for more than two seconds. A
beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) (Base
Radio with CD)
EQ (Equalization): To adjust the bass or treble, press
the f knob or EQ button until the desired tone
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
control tab displays. Turn the f knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the setting.
The display shows the current bass or treble level.
If a station’s frequency is weak, or if there is static,
decrease the treble.
EQ (Equalization): Press to select preset equalization
settings.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ button until
Manual displays or starts to manually adjust the bass,
midrange, or treble by pressing the f knob.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob until
the tone control tabs display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired tab, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired tab. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. The highlighted setting can also be adjusted
EQ (Equalization) (Radio with CD and DVD): Press to
choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for
different types of music. The choices are pop, rock,
country, talk, jazz, and classical. Selecting MANUAL or
changing bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual
bass and treble settings.
by pressing the SEEK arrows, \ FWD (forward)
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
If the radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ settings
are either MANUAL or TALK.
or s REV (reverse) button until the desired levels are
obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak, or if there
is static, decrease the treble.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
(Base Radio with CD)
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
If the radio has XM, the CAT button can be used to find
XM stations when the radio is in the XM mode.
` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
CAT (Category): To find XM channels within a desired
category, perform the following:
or fade, press the ` button or the f knob until the
desired speaker control tab displays. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the setting.
1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency is
displayed. Press the CAT button to display the
category tabs on the radio display. Continue
pressing the CAT button until the desired category
name displays.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or
fade, press the f knob until the speaker control tabs
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired
tab, or press the pushbutton positioned under the
desired tab. Turn the f knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. The
highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing the
• Depending on the radio, another way to navigate
the category list is to press the s REV button
or the \ FWD button.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category tab to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
SEEK arrows, \ FWD, or s REV button until the
desired levels are obtained.
3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right
or left arrows displayed, or press the Seek arrows
to go to the previous or to the next XM station within
the selected category.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or
FADE tab for more than two seconds. A beep sounds
and the level adjusts to the middle position.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display the favorites
again.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category,
perform the following:
Loc or Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take
the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
XM CAT tab.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During your
trial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimited
access to XM Radio Online for when you are not in the
vehicle. A service fee is required to receive the XM
service. For more information, contact XM at
3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be
removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
tab until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add tab when a removed category
displays or by pressing the pushbutton under the
Restore All tab.
xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
Categories cannot be added or removed while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
section for further detail.
Radio Messages
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for the vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for the vehicle and it must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player. This
CD player holds up to six CDs.
Care of CDs
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the ^ button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
If playing a CD, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD quality, the method of recording, the quality of the
music that has been recorded, and the way the CD
has been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD(s)
in their original cases or other protective cases and
away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD and DVD
player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the
surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole
and the outer edge.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds. A
beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to
the edge.
more CDs.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears on the
CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number displays.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
Z EJECT: Press to eject CD(s). To eject the CD that
is currently playing, press and release this button. A beep
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is
ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.
If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD
automatically pulls back into the player and begins
playing.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player
mechanism.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for
two seconds to eject all discs.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through
the tracks on the CD.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at
a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
Z EJECT (Base Radio with CD): Press to eject the
CD. If the CD is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD automatically pulls back into the player.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random) (Base Radio with CD): With the
random setting, CD tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order. To use random, do the
following:
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM tab until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
1. Press to play tracks from the CD in random order.
The random icon displays.
RPT (Repeat) (Base Radio with CD): With the repeat
setting, one track can be repeated.
2. Press again to turn off random play. The random
icon disappears from the display.
• To repeat the current track, press and release the
RPT button. An arrow symbol displays. Press
again to turn off repeat play. When repeat is off, the
arrow symbol no longer displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, tracks can
be listened to in random, rather than sequential
order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD player. To
use random, do one of the following:
4 (Information) (Base Radio with CD): Press to
switch the display between the track number, elapsed
time of the track, and the time. When the ignition is
off, press to display the time.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD
player, insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD
player. A RDM tab displays.
To play the tracks from the single CD in random
order, press the pushbutton positioned under
the RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays.
Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The CD remains safely inside the radio for
future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD
is in the player. Press again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD
player, press and hold the ^ button. A beep
sounds and Load All Discs displays. Insert one or
more discs partway into the slot of the CD player.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing
(loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing).
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release to eject the CD
that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If the
CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD
automatically pulls back into the player.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. The
CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate.
The DVD/CD decks, (upper slot is the DVD deck and the
lower slot is the CD deck) of the radio are compatible
with most audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s/WMAs.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
When a CD is inserted, the text tab DVD or CD symbol
appears on the left side of the radio display. As each new
track starts to play, the track number displays.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than five seconds have played.
If less than five seconds have played, the previous
track plays. Press the right arrow to go to the next track.
If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward through
the tracks on the CD.
Z CD (Eject): Press and release to eject the CD that
is currently playing in the bottom slot. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If the
CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD
automatically pulls back into the player.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to cycle through DVD,
CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The
DVD/CD text tab and a message showing track or
chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot.
Press again and the system automatically searches
for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
“No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the
DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles between the two sources and does not indicate
“No Aux Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all
available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front
AUX, and Rear AUX (if available). See “Using the
Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or Rear Seat
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at
a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, tracks can
be listened to in random, rather than sequential
order. To play the tracks from the CD, press the
DVD/CD AUX button when not sourced to the CD, or
insert a disc partway into the slot. A RDM tab displays.
Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM tab
until Random Current Disc displays. Press the
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for more information.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat
operator can turn on the video screen and use
the remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)
through the remote control.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD or DVD
is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside the radio
for future listening or viewing entertainment.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio Output
CD Messages
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at one time. An audio source is defined as
DVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM, Front Aux Jack, or Rear
Aux Jack.
If these messages display and/or the CD comes out, it
could be for one of the following reasons:
Optical Error: If the disc was inserted upside down.
Disk Read Error: If a disc was inserted with an invalid
or unknown format.
Press the O button to turn the radio on. The radio can
be heard through all of the vehicle speakers.
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM, FM, or
XM) by pressing the BAND button or the DVD/CD AUX
button to select CD slot, DVD slot, front or rear auxiliary
input (if available).
Player Error: If there are disc ^ or disc Z problems.
CHECK DISC: If this error message displays, it
could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack, the
front seat passengers is able to listen to playback from
this source through the vehicle speakers. See “Using
the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or Rear
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for more information.
• The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
If the vehicle has a radio with a single CD (MP3/WMA),
a six-disc CD (MP3/WMA), or a radio with a CD and
DVD player, it is capable of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R
or CD-RW disc. For more information on how to play
an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using
an MP3” in the index.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing a DVD
Using the DVD Player
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the
remote control, by the RSA system, or by the buttons
on the radio faceplate. See “Remote Control” under
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-110
for more information.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to cycle through DVD,
CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The
DVD/CD text tab and a message showing track or
chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot.
Press again and the system automatically searches
for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
“No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the
DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles between the two sources and does not indicate
“No Aux Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all
available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front
AUX, and Rear AUX (if available). See “Using the
Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or Rear Seat
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the
appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of
most DVDs.
The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio
CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,
DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3 and
WMA formats.
If an error message appears on the video screen or the
radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” under
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-110
and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in this section for
more information.
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for more information.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O (Power): Press to turn the radio on or off. Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the volume. Press and hold for more than two seconds
turns off the entire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system and starts the parental control feature
which prevents the rear seat occupant from operating
the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or remote control.
SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press to go to the
next track or chapter. This button might not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to fast reverse the CD
or DVD, five times the normal speed. The radio
displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse. To stop
fast reversing, press again. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
A lock symbol appears next to the clock display.
The parental control feature remains on until a
subsequent press and hold of the power button is
performed (more than two seconds), or until the driver
turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the CD
or DVD. The radio displays the elapsed time and fast
forwards five times the normal speed. To stop fast
forwarding, press again. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD, to
manually tune a radio station, or to change clock or date
settings, while in the clock or date setting mode. See the
information given earlier in this section specific to the
page 3-66, for setting the clock and date.
Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD or DVD. If a CD or
DVD is ejected, but not removed, the player
automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds.
© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press to return to
the start of the current track or chapter. Press again
to go to the previous track or chapter. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding a DVD.
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during
DVD playback. See the tag options listed below for
more information.
r (Enter): Press to select the choices that are
highlighted in any menu.
y (Menu): Press to access the DVD menu. The DVD
menu is different on every DVD. Use the pushbuttons
located under the navigation arrows to navigate
the cursor through the DVD menu. After making a
selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when using a DVD.
The rear seat passenger navigates the DVD-V menus
and controls through the remote control. See “Remote
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
Screen automatically turns on when the DVD-V is
inserted into the DVD slot.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either play or pause
displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward
arrow is showing on the display, the system is in
pause mode. If the pause icon is showing on the display,
the system is in playback mode. If the DVD screen is
off, press this button to turn the screen on.
navigating through the menus.
q (Return): Press to exit the current active menu
and return to the previous menu. This button operates
only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active.
Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have
finished, although there might be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the
movie automatically, press the pushbutton located under
the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio. If
the DVD still does not play, refer to the on-screen
instructions, if available.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-A is inserted, a radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during
DVD playback. See the tag options listed below for
more information.
e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle through audio
steam formats located on DVD-A disc. There is not any
type of notification for the customer to see through
the radio display, but video screen has a text field that
shows audio stream changing.
The rear seat operator navigates the DVD-A menus and
controls through the remote control. See “Remote
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 3-110 for more information. The Video
Screen does not automatically power on when the
DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually
turned on by the rear seat occupant through the
remote control power button.
Inserting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side
up, into the loading slot. The DVD player might not
accept some paper labeled media. The player starts
loading the disc into the system and display “Loading
Disc” on the radio display. At the same time, the
radio displays a softkey menu of option(s). Some discs
automatically play the movie while others default to
the softkey menu display which requires the Play, Enter,
or Navigation softkeys to be pressed (either by softkey
or by the rear seat passenger using the remote control).
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either play or pause
displayed on the radio system, to toggle between pausing
or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward arrow is
showing on the display, the system is in pause mode. If
the pause icon is showing on the display, the system is in
playback mode.
Loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD.
q Group r: Press to cycle through musical groupings
on the DVD-A disc.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
play of the disc automatically. If the RSA system is
sourced to the DVD, the movie when reloaded into the
DVD player begins to play again. In case loading
and reading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed
(unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails to eject, press
and hold the Z DVD button more than 5 seconds
to force the disc to eject.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system,
press the c button on the remote control, or press the
pushbutton located under the stop or the play/pause
symbol tags displayed on the radio. If the radio head is
sourced to something other than DVD-V, press the
DVD/CD AUX button to make DVD-V the active source.
DVD Radio Error Messages
To resume DVD playback, press the play/pause button
on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located
under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio.
The DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if
the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not
been pressed twice on the remote control. If the disc has
been ejected or the stop button has been pressed twice
on the remote control, the disc resumes playing at the
beginning of the disc.
Player Error: This message displays when there are
disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
is not from a correct region.
Ejecting a Disc
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is
present when the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is
pressed on the radio.
Press the Z button on the radio to eject the disc. If a
disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed, the
radio reloads the disc after a short period of time. The
disc is stored in the radio. The radio does not resume
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, No Input Device Found or No Aux may
display.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an
audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such
as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer,
etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for
use as another source for audio listening.
DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary) (Radio with CD and
DVD): Press to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary
while listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text tab and a
message showing track or chapter number displays
when a disc is in either slot. Press again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources
and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a
front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available options, such
as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front AUX, and Rear AUX (if
available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later
in this section, or Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
more information.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive
distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. Additional volume adjustments
might need to be made from the portable device if the
volume does not go loud or soft enough.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing until it is powered off.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3/WMA Format
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or
Six-Disc CD Player)
If you burn an MP3/WMA disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
The radio plays MP3 and WMA files that were recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with
the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps
or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album
are displayed by the radio when recorded using ID3 tags
version 1 and 2.
• The CD player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
Compressed Audio
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files. By default the radio reads only the uncompressed
audio and ignores the MP3/WMA files. Pressing the
CAT (category) button toggles between compressed and
uncompressed audio format.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to
play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. To play a larger number
of files, folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize the
length of the file, folder, or playlist name. Long
names also take up more space on the display and
might not fully display.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc
not to function in the player.
Playlists can be changed by using S c (previous)
and c T (next) folder buttons, the f knob, or
the SEEK arrows. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that
was recorded using no file folders can also be
played. If a CD-R CD-RW contains more than the
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files, the
player will access and navigate up to the maximum, but
all items over the maximum are not accessible.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions are not displayed on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder, the
radio displays ROOT.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Playing an MP3/WMA
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
CD Player), or press the ^ button and wait for the
message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side
up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW
should begin playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts
to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode was chosen as the default display. The
new track name displays.
File System and Naming
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename displays.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Z EJECT: Press to eject CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s). To
eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing,
press and release this button. A beep sounds and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove
Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed.
If the CD-R is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the
player and begins playing.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button
for two seconds to eject all discs.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA files on the CD-R
or CD-RW currently playing.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files on
the CD-R can be listened to in random, rather than
sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or all discs in a
six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of the
following:
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go
to the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to
go to the next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow is held
or pressed multiple times, the player continues moving
backward or forward through MP3/WMA files on the CD.
1. To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW
in random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc
displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn
off random play.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder tab to go to the first track in
the previous folder.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM tab until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton
again to turn off random play.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder tab to go to the first track in the
next folder.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By tab. From
the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the album
button. Press the pushbutton below the back tab to return
to the main music navigator screen. Now the album name
is displayed on the second line between the arrows and
songs from the current album begins to play. Once all
songs from that album are played, the player moves to
the next album in alphabetical order on the CD-R/CD-RW
and begin playing MP3/WMA files from that album.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below
the music navigator tab. The player scans the disc to sort
the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It can
take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the
number of MP3/WMA files recorded to the CD-R or
CD-RW. The radio can begin playing while it is scanning
the disc in the background. When the scan is finished, the
CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back tab to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults
to playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist are
played, the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical
order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3
files by that artist. To listen to MP3/WMA files by another
artist, press the pushbutton located below either arrow
button. The CD goes to the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue pressing either button until
the desired artist displays.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for
future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD
is in the player. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Input Device Found”
displays.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
DVD Player)
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files depending on which slot the disc is loaded into. By
default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio
(.CDA) and ignores the MP3/WMA files on the DVD
deck. On the CD deck, pressing the CAT (category)
button toggles between compressed and uncompressed
audio format, the default being the uncompressed
format (.CDA).
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u.wpl or.pls
extension, other file extensions might not work.
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to
play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. To play a larger number
of files, folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize the
length of the file, folder or playlist name. Long
names also take up more space on the display.
MP3/WMA Format
If you burn an MP3/WMA disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc
not to function in the player.
• The CD player (lower slot) is able to read and play
a maximum combination of 512 files and folders.
The DVD player (upper slot) is able to read
255 folders, 15 playlists and 40 sessions.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Root Directory
Order of Play
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Empty Directory or Folder
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file
structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder does
not display.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode is chosen as the default display. The
new track name displays.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions are not displayed on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder the
radio displays ROOT.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Z CD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the
bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The
CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or
CD-RW is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R
or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player.
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3 (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold this button for more than five seconds
to force the disc to eject.
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into either the top or
bottom slot, label side up. The player pulls it in, and
the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release to eject the CD-R
or CD-RW that is currently playing in the top slot. A
beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc
is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or
CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW
automatically pulls back into the player. If loading
and reading of a CD cannot be completed, such as
unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press
and hold this button for more than five seconds to
force the disc to eject.
Depending on the format of the disc, a softkey menu
appears and allow navigation of the disc. The menu
reads left to right as RDM (Randomize song play order),
a Folder icon with left and right arrows (to move up or
down through available folders), a PL tag if the disc has
a Playlist available, and a Music Navigator tag. If a
Playlist tag is shown, toggling this key brings up a Folder
softkey only or the menu as previously described.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts
to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA files on the CD-R
or CD-RW currently playing.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be played in random,
rather than sequential order. To listen to MP3/WMA files
from the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in
random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the
RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
five seconds have played. If less than five seconds have
played, the previous MP3/WMA file plays. Press the
right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file.
If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times,
the player continues moving backward or forward
through the MP3/WMA files on the CD.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton
located below the music navigator tab. The player scans
the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag
information. It can take several minutes to scan the disc
depending on the number of MP3/WMA files recorded
to the CD-R or CD-RW.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder tab to go to the first track in
the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder tab to go to the first track in the
next folder.
To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning,
press the pushbutton located below the music
navigator tab or eject the disc.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
The radio could begin playing while it is scanning the
disc in the background. When the scan is finished,
the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. To listen to MP3/WMA files by
another artist, press the pushbutton located below either
arrow tab. Continue pressing either button until the
desired artist is displayed.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to cycle through DVD,
CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The
DVD/CD text tab and a message showing track or
chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot.
Press this button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is in
both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles between the two sources and does
not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front auxiliary
device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
through all available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,
Front AUX, and Rear AUX (if available). See “Using
the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-110
Rear Seat Entertainment System, “Audio/Video (A/V)
Jacks” for more information.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By tab. From
the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the album
button. Press the pushbutton below the back tab to return
to the main music navigator screen. The album name
displays on the second line between the arrows and
songs from the current album begins to play. Once all
songs from that album are played, the player moves to
the next album in alphabetical order on the CD-R/CD-RW
and begins playing MP3/WMA files from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back tab to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear
seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the
remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)
through the remote control.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD or a
DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside the radio
for future listening or viewing entertainment.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the
signal should return.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM™ receiver in your vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle. For
security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped
between vehicles. If this message is received after
having your vehicle serviced, check with your
dealer/retailer.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum. The
system may not recognize voice commands if there is
too much background noise.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
Navigation/Radio System
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the
separate Navigation System manual.
Audio System
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and over-rides the audio system. Use the audio
system volume knob, during a call, to change the
volume level. The adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. To prevent missed calls, a
minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned
down too low.
Bluetooth®
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and
receive phone calls. The system can be used while the
key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The
range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m).
Not all phones support all functions, and not all phones
are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
system. See gm.com/bluetooth for more information on
compatible phones.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing Information:
Bluetooth Controls
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
information.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar®
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
Hands-Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner’s guide for more information.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on
this process.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN
number that was provided in Step 3.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats
the number followed by “Please say yes or no”.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. If the
number is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the number to be re-entered.
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
Using the Store Command
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone
number.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• Delete
• Delete all name tags
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete,
<name tag>? Please say yes or no”.
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
• Dial
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete the
name tag. The system responds with “OK,
• Digit Dial
• Call
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”
• Re-dial
Using the Dial Command
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar,
if present.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. Number please” followed by a tone.
To use the delete all name tags command:
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
• If the system does not recognize the number, it
confirms the numbers followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be
re-entered.
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
main menu.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
Using the Digit Dial Command
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed
by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling,
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
<name tag>” and dials the number. If the name
tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the name tag to be re-entered.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds with
“OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Using the Re-dial Command
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
Using the Call Command
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving a Call
Three-Way Calling
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to
work.
• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c x to ignore a call.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Call Waiting
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when another
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all
call is active. The original call is placed on hold.
the callers together.
• Press b g again to return to the original call.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the original
call with no action.
Ending a Call
Press c x to end a call.
• Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Muting a Call
Transferring a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the
call cannot hear them.
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
To Mute a call
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
To Cancel Mute
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Number During a Call
Voice Pass-Thru
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK,
accessing <phone name>”.
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is
used when calling a menu driven phone system.
Account numbers can be programmed into the
phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the name tag to send.
Other Information
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the phonebook
and phone pairing information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the above sections
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try to do so.
The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system works with the vehicle’s
audio system. The DVD player is part of the front radio.
The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player, a
video display screen, audio/video jacks, two wireless
page 3-69 for more information on the vehicle’s audio/
DVD system.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE
system might not work until the temperature is within
the operating range. The operating range for the
RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below
140°F (60°C). If the temperature of the vehicle is
outside of this range, heat or cool the vehicle until the
temperature is within the operating range of the
RSE system.
Parental Control
The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature,
depending on which radio the vehicle has. To enable
Parental Control, press and hold the radio power button
for more than two seconds to stop all system features
such as: radio, video screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD.
While Parental Control is on, a padlock icon displays.
Headphones
The RSE includes two sets of wireless headphones that
are only dedicated to this system. These headphones
are used to listen to the DVD radio or an auxiliary device
connected to the RCA jacks. The wireless headphones
have an ON/OFF switch and a volume control.
When the radio is turned back on, Parental Control
is unlocked.
To use the headphones, turn the switch to ON. An
indicator light located on the headphones illuminates. If
the light does not illuminate, the batteries might need
to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section for more information. Switch the headphones
to OFF when not in use.
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The infrared transmitters are located in the display below
the video screen. The headphones shut off automatically
to save the battery power if the RSE system and RSA are
shut off or if the headphones are out of range of the
transmitters for more than three minutes. If you move too
far forward or step out of the vehicle, the headphones
lose the audio signal.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries on the headphones, do the
following:
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located
on the left side of the headphones. Slide the
battery door open.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door
screw.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
The foam ear pads attached to the headphones can
become worn or damaged if they are not handled or
stored properly. If the foam ear pads do become
damaged or worn out, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set. It is not necessary to
replace the complete headphone set. The headphone
replacement foam ear pads can be ordered in pairs. See
your dealer/retailer for more information.
3-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V jacks
and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen
power on. If the video screen is in the DVD player mode,
pressing the AUX button on the remote control switches
the video screen from the DVD player mode to the
auxiliary device. The radio can listen to the audio of the
connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary. See
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
How to Change the RSE Video Screen
Settings
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
screen brightness, and setup menu language can be
changed from the on screen setup menu. To change any
feature, perform the following:
The A/V jacks are located on the rear of the floor
console. The A/V jacks allow audio or video signals to
be connected from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Adapter connectors or cables might be required to
connect the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
1. Press the z (display menu) button on the remote
control.
2. Use the remote control menu n , q , p , o
(navigation) arrows and the r (enter) button
to use the setup menu.
The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (A) is
for the video input. The white jack (B) is for the left
audio input. The red jack is (C) for the right audio input.
3. Press the z button again to remove the setup
menu from the screen.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the
radio system.
3-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio Output
Video Screen
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
1. Push the release button located on the overhead
console.
2. Move the screen to the desired position.
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat
audio system, if the vehicle has this feature.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to the
wireless headphones, if there is audio available. See
“Headphones” earlier in this section for more information.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen remains on, this is normal, and
the DVD continues to play through the previous audio
source. Use the remote control O button or Z the disc
to turn off the screen.
When a device is connected to the radio’s auxiliary
input jack, if the vehicle has this feature, or A/V jacks,
the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio from
the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired
headphones. The front seat passengers are able to
listen to playback from this device through the vehicle
speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio.
The overhead console contains the IR transmitters for
the wireless headphones and the IR receivers for
the remote control. They are located at the rear of the
console.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
3-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the RSE overhead console and
press the desired button. Direct sunlight or very
bright light can affect the ability of the RSE transmitter
to receive signals from the remote control. If the remote
control does not seem to be working, the batteries
may need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement”
later in this section. Objects blocking the line of sight can
also affect the function of the remote control.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote
control power button can be used to turn on the video
screen display and start the disc. The radio can also
page 3-69 for more information.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or in
direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs will not
be covered by the warranty. Storage in extreme cold
can weaken the batteries. Keep the remote control
stored in a cool, dry place.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the video screen
on and off.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight automatically
times out after 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is
pressed while the backlight is on.
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD. This function varies for
each disc.
3-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the DVD
menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD.
Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around
the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter
button. This button only operates when using a DVD.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playing a
DVD. Press this button while a DVD is playing to
pause it. Press it again to continue playing the DVD.
When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio, slow
play may be performed by pressing the play/pause
button then pressing the fast forward button. The DVD
continues playing in a slow play mode. Depending
on the radio, slow reverse may be performed by
pressing the play/pause button and then pressing the
fast reverse button while a DVD is playing. To
cancel slow play mode, press this button.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use
the navigation arrows to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choice that
is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjust the
brightness, screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom),
and display the language menu.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press
this button again to go to the previous track or
chapter. This button might not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button operates only when the display menu or a DVD
menu is active.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go to
the beginning of the next chapter or track. This
button might not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this button twice to
return to the beginning of the DVD.
3-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the system
between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video,
press the play/pause button. To stop fast reversing a
DVD audio or CD, release the fast reverse button. This
button might not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
d (Camera): Press this button to change camera
angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function vary
for each disc.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD
video, press the play/pause button. To stop fast
forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release the fast forward
button. This button might not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
\ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds after
inputting a numeric selection, to clear all numeric
inputs.
e (Audio): Press this button to change audio tracks on
DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function vary for
each disc.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to
select chapter or track numbers greater than 9. Press
this button before inputting the number.
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a new
universal remote control can be purchased. If this
happens, make sure the universal remote control uses a
code set of Toshiba®.
{ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFF
subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this function
vary for each disc.
3-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Problem
Recommended Action
The remote control does
not work.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
transmitter window.
To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
1. Slide the rear cover back on the remote control.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. Make
sure that they are installed correctly, using the
diagram on the inside of the battery compartment.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
3. Replace the battery cover.
incorrectly.
After stopping the player, I If the stop button was
push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
the DVD starts where I
DVD player resumes
left off and sometimes at playing where the DVD
the beginning.
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player
begins to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
Problem
No power.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
turned ON/RUN or in
ACC/ACCESSORY.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video
screen is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
The picture does not fill the Check the display mode
screen. There are black
borders on the top and
settings in the setup menu
by pressing the display
bottom or on both sides or menu button on the remote
it looks stretched out.
control.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
3-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Display Error Messages
Problem
Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions,
The DVD display error message depends on which
radio the vehicle has. The video screen can display one
of the following:
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
or buzzes.
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using a
cellular telephone in the
vehicle.
Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displays when
there are disc load or eject problems.
Check that the
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
headphones are on
correctly using the L (left)
and R (right) on the
headphones.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
is not from a correct region.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
See your dealer/retailer
for assistance.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is
present when the Z button is pressed on the radio.
The DVD is playing, but
there is no picture or
sound.
Check that the RSE video
screen is sourced to the
DVD player.
3-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Distortion
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Video distortion may occur when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending on
the vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use
only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
e + e − (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage can result.
the radio volume.
w (Next): Press to go to the next radio station stored
as a favorite, or the next track if a CD/DVD is playing.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
3-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x c (Previous / Phone On Hook): Press to go to
the previous radio station stored as a favorite, the
previous track if a CD/DVD is playing, to reject an
incoming call, or end a current call.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
b g (Push to Talk / Mute): Press to silence the
vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems press
and hold b g for longer than two seconds to
for more information.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power outlet.
3-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Multi-Band Antenna
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.
The multi-band antenna is located on the roof of the
vehicle. The antenna is used for the AM/FM radio,
OnStar® and the XM™ Satellite Radio Service System,
if the vehicle has these features. Keep the antenna
clear of obstructions for clear reception. If the vehicle
has a sunroof, the performance of the AM/FM radio,
OnStar®, and the XM system may be affected if
the sunroof is open.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
causes an increased level of static while listening to
the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
3-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defensive Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively
is to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
{ CAUTION:
• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
• Focus on the task of driving.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION:
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if
the person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems than the tires and road
can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between
hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a
lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot
of unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
the vehicle and others is important.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being
driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder
to push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some
power brake assist but it will be used when the brake
is applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can
take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight
of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel,
as required, faster than any driver could. This can
help the driver steer around the obstacle while
braking hard.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
an advanced electronic braking system that will
help prevent a braking skid.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves a little. This is normal.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed
to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump
or motor might be heard operating and the brake pedal
might be felt to pulsate, but this is normal.
page 3-32.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Braking in Emergencies
StabiliTrak® System
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
The vehicle has the StabiliTrak system, an advanced
computer controlled system that helps the driver
maintain directional control of the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions. This is accomplished by selectively
applying any one of the vehicle’s brakes and reducing
power. The Stabilitrak system comes on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started.
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed
in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake control module to
supplement the power brake system under conditions
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down
the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control
module increases brake pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal
pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal
and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature
will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is
released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.
The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC) and
the StabiliTrak/Traction Control System (TCS) warning
light will come on the instrument panel cluster after first
driving the vehicle and exceeding 30 mph 48 (km/h) for
30 seconds. The StabiliTrak system is off until the light
has turned off. This could take up to 15 minutes. See
information.
The StabiliTrak/TCS
warning light on the
instrument panel cluster
will flash when the system
is operating.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working.
This is normal. This light may also come on after
extended heavy braking, indicating the brakes have
become too hot to limit wheel spin.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road
conditions. The system operates only if it senses that one
or more of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose
traction. When this happens, the system works the
brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
StabiliTrak can be turned
off using the StabiliTrak/
TCS control button.
This light flashes while the
traction control system is
limiting wheel spin.
To disable StabiliTrak, press and hold the traction
control button until the StabiliTrak/TCS warning light
comes on the instrument panel. StabiliTrak can be
activated again by pressing the StabiliTrak/TCS button.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working,
but this is normal. This light may also come on
after extended heavy braking indicating the brakes
have become too hot to limit wheel spin.
The SERVICE STABILITRAK message will be displayed
and the StabiliTrak/TCS warning light on the instrument
panel cluster will come on if there is a problem with the
system. When this light and the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message are on, the system is not operational. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCS automatically comes on whenever the vehicle is
started. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, the system should always be left on. But TCS
can be turned off if needed. The system should be turned
off if the vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or
snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See Rocking
The traction control system can be activated again by
pressing the traction control button. While the traction
control system is activated, the StabiliTrak/TCS warning
light comes on the instrument panel cluster and
TRACTION CONTROL ON briefly displays.
If the system is limiting wheel spin when the button is
pressed, the StabiliTrak/TCS warning light comes on the
instrument panel cluster. The system will not turn off until
there is no longer a current need to limit wheel spin. Turn
the system back on by pressing the button again. If the
light does not come on, TCS might not be working and
the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer/retailer.
TCS can be turned off by
pressing the StabiliTrak/
TCS button, located next
to the gear shift lever.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
When TCS is turned off, the StabiliTrak/TCS warning
light comes on the instrument panel cluster and
TRACTION CONTROL OFF briefly displays.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
information.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If the vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD
system operates automatically without any action
required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin
to slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive
the vehicle as required. Torque is also applied to the
rear wheels during launches. There may be a slight
engagement noise during hard use but this is normal.
The All-Wheel Drive
Disabled Light comes
on along with the ALL
WHEEL DRIVE OFF
message when the
rear drive system is
overheating.
The Service All-Wheel
Drive Light is located on
the instrument panel
cluster.
This light will turn off when the rear drive system cools
down. If this light stays on, it must be reset. To reset
the light, turn the ignition off and then back on again.
If the light stays on, see your dealer/retailer for service.
more information.
This light and the SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
message in the DIC will come on and stay on to indicate
there may be a problem with the drive system and service
is required.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydraulic Power Steering
(3.6L V6 Engine)
Steering
Electric Power Steering
(3.4L V6 Engine)
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the power steering system is not functioning, the
vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort.
If the engine stalls while driving, the power steering
assist system will continue to operate until you are able to
stop the vehicle. If power steering assist is lost because
the electric power steering system is not functioning, the
vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time,
you may notice a reduced amount of power steering
assist. The normal amount of power steering assist
should return shortly after a few normal steering
movements.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems, such as abnormally high steering effort for a
prolonged period of time, contact your dealer/retailer
for service repairs.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is
no room. That is the time for evasive action —steering
around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and
a quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your
side of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, (about
one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to
a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If the traction system is off, then
an acceleration skid is best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal. See Traction Control
on page 4-6.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep-standing or
flowing water.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
{ CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
• Watch for animals.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water. This
can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going
fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has
little or no contact with the road.
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
• Allow extra following distance.
Have up-to-date maps?
• Pass with caution.
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
on page 5-51.
Other driving tips include:
• Turn off cruise control.
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{ CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{ CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads,
but slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. When driving through deep snow, turn off
the traction control system to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain begins
to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet
ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt
or sand.
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, but
apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface
under the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Blizzard Conditions
CAUTION: (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
{ CAUTION:
For more information about carbon monoxide,
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
CAUTION: (Continued)
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about
to keep warm also helps.
{ CAUTION:
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and
to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as
possible to save fuel.
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid
going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not
get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be
towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out,
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle show
how much weight it may properly carry, the Tire
and Loading Information label and the Vehicle
Certification label.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The tire and loading information label lists the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds. The vehicle capacity weight includes
the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation, see
on page 5-59.
There is also important loading information on
the Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Example 2
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs
1,000 lbs
A
A
(453 kg)
(453 kg)
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Available Cargo
Weight =
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
on the rear edge of the driver’s door, or on
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar).
The label shows the size of your original tires and
the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo.
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you
with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally
on both sides of the centerline.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is
a crash, they will keep going.
{ CAUTION:
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
Towing
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer/
retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled
vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Assistance
• What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
• Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See “Dolly Towing” following. If the vehicle is
all-wheel-drive, it cannot be towed with any of its
wheels on the ground. It must be towed with a
platform truck or trailer.
Dinghy Towing (Vehicles with a
5-speed Transmission)
Dinghy Towing (Vehicles with a
6-speed Transmission)
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle
with any of its wheels on the ground.
If the vehicle is front-wheel-drive, it can be dinghy towed
from the front. These vehicles may also be towed by
putting the front wheels on a dolly. See “Dolly Towing”
later in this section.
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all of its
wheels on the ground. If the vehicle is front-wheel drive,
it can be towed with two of its wheels on the ground.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive, it can be dinghy towed
from the front. These vehicles can also be towed by
placing them on a platform trailer with all four wheels
off of the ground. These vehicles cannot be towed using
a dolly.
Notice: If the vehicle is towed without performing
each of the steps listed under “Dinghy Towing,”
the automatic transmission could be damaged.
Be sure to follow all steps of the dinghy towing
procedure prior to and after towing the vehicle.
For vehicles being dinghy towed, re-install the fuse and
run the vehicle at the beginning of each day and at each
RV fuel stop for about five minutes. This will ensure
proper lubrication of transmission components.
Notice: If 65 mph (105 km/h) is exceeded while
towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing the vehicle.
Once the destination has been reached:
1. Set the parking brake.
To tow a vehicle with a 6–speed transmission from the
front with all four wheels on the ground:
2. Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuse to the engine
compartment fuse block.
1. Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow
vehicle and shift the transmission to P (Park).
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park), turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF and remove the key from the ignition.
2. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
4. Release the parking brake.
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow
vehicle.
Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with the front drive
wheels on the ground if one of the front tires
is a compact spare tire. Towing with two different
tire sizes on the front of the vehicle can cause
severe damage to the transmission.
5. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.
6. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
7. To prevent the battery from draining while the
vehicle is being towed, remove the 50 amp
BATT1 fuse from the engine compartment fuse
block and store in a safe location. See Engine
8. Release the parking brake.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To dolly tow a front-wheel drive vehicle with a 5–speed
transmission from the front with two of its wheels on
the ground:
Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles with a 5-speed Transmission)
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
5. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the dolly.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
with a 5-speed Transmission)
Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles with a 6-speed Transmission)
To tow a front-wheel-drive vehicle from the front with
two wheels on the ground:
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two
of its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle
with any of its wheels on the ground.
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.
If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive with a 5–speed
transmission, it cannot be towed with any of its wheels
on the ground. It must be towed with a platform truck
or trailer.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
with a 6-speed Transmission)
5. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the dolly.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be towed with two
wheels on the ground. To properly tow these vehicles,
they should be placed on a platform truck or trailer
with all four wheels off of the ground or dinghy towed
from the front.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing the Vehicle From the Rear
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Never have the vehicle towed from the rear.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment.
Towing a Trailer
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read
the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears
later in this section.
{ CAUTION:
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,
braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe
trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used
properly.
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even at
all. The driver and passengers could be seriously
injured. The vehicle may also be damaged; the
resulting repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps
in this section have been followed. Ask your
dealer/retailer for advice and information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these
are important for your safety and that of your passengers.
So please read this section carefully before pulling a
trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, wheel assemblies and tires are forced
to work harder against the drag of the added weight.
The engine is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your
dealer/retailer for important information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• Weight of the trailer
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
• Weight of the trailer tongue
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Weight on your vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
The vehicle can tow up to 3,500 lbs (1 575 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much
the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can
depend on any special equipment on the vehicle, and
the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section
for more information.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in
at the heavier loads.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
• Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission
to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
information.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the
vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there are a lot of
options, equipment, passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it
will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow.
If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be added to the
GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight,
information about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
If a weight-carrying hitch or a weight-distributing hitch
is being used, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh
10-15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. These numbers can be found on
page 4-20 for more information. Make sure not to go
over the GVW limit for the vehicle, or the GAWR,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hitches
Safety Chains
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so the rig can turn. Never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
• Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle
when the trailer hitch is installed? If so, be sure to
seal the holes when the hitch is removed. If they
are not sealed, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from
the engine’s exhaust can get into the vehicle. See
also prevent dirt and water from entering the vehicle.
Trailer Brakes
A loaded trailer that weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(900 kg) needs to have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are
installed, adjusted and maintained properly. Because the
vehicle has StabiliTrak, do not try to tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system. If you do, both brake systems will
not work well, or at all.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Get to know the rig before setting out for
the open road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling
and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And
always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by
itself.
Driving with a Trailer
{ CAUTION:
When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect
at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate,
trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
To maximize safety when towing a trailer:
• Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks
and make necessary repairs before starting
a trip.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
• Never drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or
rear-most window open.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electronic Trailer Sway Control
Passing
Electronic Trailer Sway Control is integrated into the
StabiliTrak system of the vehicle. This feature detects
the occurrence of trailer sway that may be caused by
improper trailer weight balance, or excessive vehicle
speed. When the system detects trailer sway, the
StabiliTrak system may begin to apply the front brakes,
without you pressing the brake pedal, to help in stabilizing
the vehicle. The StabiliTrak warning light will flash to
indicate that vehicle speed should be reduced. If the
trailer continues to sway, StabiliTrak will reduce engine
torque as a method to reduce the speed of the vehicle.
Reducing the speed of the vehicle is necessary to
reduce trailer sway. Electronic Trailer Sway Control
is de-activated when StabiliTrak is turned off, and is
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the
vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to
a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. For this reason you may think other
drivers are seeing the signal when they are not.
It is important to check occasionally to be sure the
trailer bulbs are still working.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar
to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run
while parked, preferably on level ground, with the
automatic transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes
before turning the engine off. If the overheat warning
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking on Hills
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
• Start the engine
{ CAUTION:
• Shift into a gear
• Release the parking brake
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a
flat surface.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See this manual’s Maintenance Schedule or Index
for more information. Things that are especially important
in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid,
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake
system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and
during the trip.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park).
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-29.
5. Release the brake pedal.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added
to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/
retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some
component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. English and metric fasteners can
be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners are
used, parts can later break or fall off. You could
be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain
perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep
the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage
and the date of any service work performed. See
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Octane
Gasoline Specifications
If the vehicle has the 3.4L V6 engine (VIN Code F), use
regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87, you
might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive,
commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and
you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
additional information.
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7), use
regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer towing,
you could choose to use middle grade 89 octane
unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the vehicle
warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS
is the only gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
page 3-34.
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
{ CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This
may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light
and may damage the fuel tank and emissions system.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle, to the left of
the brake pedal.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and move the
secondary hood release lever to the right.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 5-37.
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
page 5-23.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 3.6L V6, here is what you will see:
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View).
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of View). See “When to Add
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
page 5-37.
on page 5-22.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-32.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the location of the engine
oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the
dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommended
oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
SAE 5W-30 may not
appear on all caps.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range in the cross-hatched area. Push the
dipstick all the way back in when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils meeting these
Look for three things:
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
• GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Temperature Operation
Engine Oil Life System
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine
Oil to Use” for more information.
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A change engine oil light and a CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message come on. Change the oil as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the
oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service people who will perform this work using
genuine parts and reset the system. It is also important to
check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a change engine oil light
or CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being turned
on, reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
three times within five seconds.
The change engine oil light will flash while the
system is resetting.
3. When the light stops flashing, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF.
If the light or message comes back on and stays on
when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
for more information on location.
1. Turn off the engine.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required.
2. Disconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector.
3. Loosen the screws on the clamps holding the air
outlet duct in place. Do not pry the clamps off.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Reinstall the filter cover and latch the clamps.
8. Reattach the air outlet duct and tighten the screws
on the clamps that hold the duct in place.
9. Reconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector.
{ CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
4. Remove the air outlet duct.
5. Undo the clamps on the filter cover. To remove
the cover, pull up on the front and then pull the
cover out.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into the engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
6. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
Wipe all dust from inside of the housing and inspect
the air cleaner and air outlet duct for cracks, cuts,
and deterioration. The air outlet duct must be
replaced if damaged.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Cooling System
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealer/retailer
and have it repaired as soon as possible.
The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
For the 3.6L engine, the transmission fluid will not reach
the end of the dipstick unless the transmission is at
operating temperature. If you need to check the
transmission fluid level, please take your vehicle to
your dealer/retailer.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Coolant Surge Tank
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-29
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
What to Use
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
{ CAUTION:
outside temperature.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at or above the COLD
FILL mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but
be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
The surge tank is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the COLD FILL line. When your engine is warm, the level
should be at the COLD FILL line or a little higher.
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line. If it
is not, you may have a leak in the cooling system.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when
the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to
cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and
it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do
not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank.
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the
cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss, wait
for that to stop. This will allow any pressure still
left to be vented out the discharge hose.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to the COLD
FILL line.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight.
6. After driving the vehicle, check the level in the
surge tank again when the cooling system has
cooled down.
If the coolant is not at the proper level, repeat
Steps 1 through 3 and reinstall the pressure cap.
If the coolant is not at the proper level when the
system cools down again, see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the
COLD FILL line.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
different types of engine overheating messages that
may be displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
{ CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running.
If they are not, do not continue to run the engine and
have the vehicle serviced.
on page 5-30 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving with
no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged. The
costly repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for three
minutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed,
turn off the engine until it cools down. Also, see
“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
• Stops after high-speed driving.
• Idles for long periods in traffic.
• Tows a trailer.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode lets the vehicle be
driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this
mode, there is a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The temperature gage indicates an
overheat condition exists. Driving extended distances
and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode
should be avoided.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air conditioner off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. If in a traffic jam, try to minimize engine load. Shift
to N (Neutral); otherwise, shift to the highest gear
while driving.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the
cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays,
the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle
slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance
from the car in front of you. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
reservoir location.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The fluid level should be between the Min (Minimum) and
Max (Maximum) marks when the engine is cold, and at
the Max mark when the engine is hot. If the fluid is at the
Min mark when the engine is cold or hot, power steering
fluid should be added.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power steering fluid is used in all vehicles with the
3.6L V6 engine. Vehicles with the 3.4L V6 engine
have electric power steering and do not use power
steering fluid.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
page 6-11.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
When you need windshield or rear window washer fluid
be sure to read the instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Windshield Washer Fluid
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the
{ CAUTION:
reservoir.
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
Use only new DOT-3 brake fluid from a sealed
page 6-11.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
{ CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying
the brake pedal firmly.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
{ CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
Vehicle Storage
{ CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Battery
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one
that has the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
For battery replacement, see your dealer/retailer or the
service manual. To purchase a service manual, see
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
All doors and the liftgate must be closed before
reconnecting the battery. After reconnecting the
battery, press the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter. Failure to follow this procedure could result in
the alarm sounding. Pressing unlock on the keyless
access transmitter will stop the alarm.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the
parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the
jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission
in P (PARK) or a manual transmission in N (Neutral)
before setting the parking brake.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations on each vehicle.
You will not need to access your battery for jump
starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) and
a remote negative (−) jump starting terminal for
that purpose.
The remote positive (+) terminal is located under the
engine compartment fuse block cover, and is
marked with a plus (+) symbol on the cover.
5. To remove the fuse block cover, push in the two
locking tabs located on the rear of the cover, and lift.
To reinstall, fit together the tabs located on the front
of the cover and push down on the cover until the
tabs on the rear of the cover, click into place.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.4L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
The remote negative (−) terminal is located in the
front of the engine compartment, near the engine oil
dipstick.
for more information on the location of the remote
positive (+) terminal and the engine oil dipstick.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{ CAUTION:
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do
not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your
eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water
and get medical help immediately.
{ CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
{ CAUTION:
CAUTION: (Continued)
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too.
9. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
Do not let the other end touch anything until
the next step. The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes
to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a
remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts, too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
10. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
7. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal
for this purpose.
11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
8. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
12. Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter to disarm your content
theft-deterrent system.
13. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the fuse block cover to its original position.
All-Wheel Drive
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to perform
the lubricant checks described in this section. However,
there are two additional systems that need lubrication.
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit)
When to Check Lubricant
Jumper Cable Removal
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
PTU for 3.6 L V6 Model
PTU for 3.4 L V6 Model
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Use
How to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Carrier Assembly-Differential
(Rear Drive Module)
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
AWD Differential Case for 3.4 L and 3.6 L V6 Models
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll
need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to
raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. A fluid
loss could indicate a problem; check and have it repaired,
if needed.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Use
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
Halogen Bulbs
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
{ CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
A. Sidemarker Lamp
B. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
C. Low/High-Beam/DRL Headlamp
4. Pull the locking tab back on the bulb socket and
push the release tab in to release the wiring
harness. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
to remove it from the headlamp assembly.
2. Remove the three headlamp assembly attachment
screws.
3. Pull the headlamp assembly toward you to release
it from the hidden, lower headlamp mount. The
headlamp assembly will need to be carefully
disengaged from the vehicle.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
6. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
socket into the headlamp assembly by turning it
clockwise.
7. Reconnect the electrical connector.
8. Push the headlamp back into the lower headlamp
mount carefully.
9. Reinstall the three headlamp assembly screws.
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Sidemarker Lamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp/Taillamp
C. Backup Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove
the bulb socket from the taillamp assembly.
6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
7. Push the new bulb straight into the bulb socket until
it clicks.
8. Insert the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly
and turn it clockwise to secure.
9. Push the taillamp assembly straight into place on
the vehicle.
10. Reinstall the taillamp screws. Do not overtighten.
11. Reinstall the taillamp screw covers.
2. Remove the taillamp screw covers.
3. Remove the taillamp screws.
4. Pull the taillamp assembly towards you.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the new bulb in and turn clockwise to lock into
place.
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
5. Push and turn the license plate lamp up through
the liftgate opening.
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license
plate lamps to the liftgate handle.
6. Reinstall the two screws holding the license plate
lamp to the liftgate handle.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-Up, Rear Turn Signal,
Stoplamp and Taillamp
3157
Front and Rear Sidemarker Lamp
Front Turn Signal Lamp
License Plate Lamp
194
5702A
9421330
H13
Low/High-Beam Headlamp/DRL
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp down through
the liftgate opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly:
2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the hook
and push the wiper arm (A) out of the blade (C).
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release lever click into
place.
To replace the rear window wiper blade:
1. Lift the wiper blade arm straight toward you.
2. Push the blade release button and slide the whole
blade to the right to remove.
3. Install the new blade.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
5-50
4. Push the wiper blade arm back into place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details. For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be
checked when your tires are cold. See
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
{ CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading the
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
page 5-70.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact
page 5-75.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
page 5-59.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Size
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as
it is wide.
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of
the tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is the
maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 5-59.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The
side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
page 4-20.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
High-Speed Operation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
{ CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have
a crash and you or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has P235/50R18 size tires, they will
require inflation pressure adjustment when driving your
vehicle at speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher. Set
the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation
pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or 35 psi (241 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the example following. When you
end this high-speed driving, return the tires to the cold tire
inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s
tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for
high-speed driving at 35 psi (241 kPa).
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies
with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
additional information.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding
the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and
transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located
in the vehicle.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Loading Information label and its location on your
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the
low tire pressure warning
light located on the
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
instrument panel cluster.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and details about the
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
on page 3-50.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come
on are:
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a
low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if
the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or
more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/
wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air
pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire’s sidewall.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,
confirms that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and wheel position.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes
to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to start over.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process is no longer active. The
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
lock and unlock buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE
LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC
screen.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
page 4-20.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have only
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less
of tread remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if
needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See
indicators.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to
meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride and handling, traction
control, and tire pressure monitoring performance.
GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s
sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an
all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will
be followed by an MS for mud and snow. See Tire
information.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will
help keep your vehicle performing most like it did
when the tires were new. Replacing less than a full
set of tires can affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle. See Tire Inspection
proper tire rotation.
{ CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)
as your vehicle’s original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial and bias-belted
tires), the vehicle may not handle properly,
and you could have a crash. Using tires of
different sizes, brands, or types may also
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the correct size, brand, and type of tires
on all wheels. It is all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as it was
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on
your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a
low-pressure warning that is higher or lower than
the proper warning level you would get with TPC
Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-61.
developed for use on your vehicle. See
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label. See
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
{ CAUTION:
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
{ WARNING:
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
{ WARNING:
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Replacement
{ CAUTION:
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
information.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how
far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could
cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to the vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it is contacting the
vehicle, and do not spin the vehicle’s wheels. If
you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{ CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
If your vehicle has the rear compartment storage
panel/cover, you will have to remove it to access the
load floor. See Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover
on page 2-42 for more information.
To access the spare tire and tools:
2. Remove the nut retaining the spare tire.
4. Locate the jack and wheel wrench, which are
located on the driver’s side of the rear cargo
area, behind an access door. Pull out the access
door to reach them.
1. Lift the load floor up and pull it out of the vehicle
and set it aside.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove the wing-bolt
holding the jack and
then remove it.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Take off the wheel cover or center cap, if the vehicle
has one, to reach the wheel bolts.
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See
information.
2. Loosen all five plastic
caps by turning
the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Do
not try to remove plastic
caps from the cover or
center cap.
6. Remove the hook and loop fastener straps holding
the bag containing the wheel wrench. Remove the
wheel wrench from the bag.
7. Extend the socket portion of the wrench from the
handle.
3. Pull the cover or center cap away from the wheel.
Store the wheel cover in the cargo area until you
have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
4. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack bolt head and
turn the wheel wrench clockwise. That will raise the
lift head a little.
6. Place the jack near the flat tire.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
7. Find the arrow on the plastic lower body panel.
Position the jack head under the metal jacking
flange and not the plastic lower body panel.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
With the jack head positioned correctly on the metal
jacking flange, it should look like this underneath
the vehicle.
Do not lift the vehicle using the plastic lower body
panel.
8. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
9. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the road tire to
clear the ground.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or
a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
page 5-76.
11. Remove the flat tire.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
13. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
15. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
{ CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
14. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut by hand
until the wheel is held against the hub.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
{ CAUTION:
sequence, as shown.
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts can
cause the wheel to come loose and even come
off. This could lead to a crash. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new original
equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon
as you can and have the nuts tightened with a
torque wrench to the proper torque specification.
for wheel nut torque specification.
17. Lower the jack all the way and remove the jack
from under the vehicle.
18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly with the wheel
wrench.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
When reinstalling the wheel cover or center cap on the
full-size tire, tighten all five plastic caps hand snug with
the aid of the wheel wrench and tighten them with the
wheel wrench an additional one-quarter of a turn.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the
compact spare, the cover or the spare could be
damaged.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Install the jack in the
left side panel of cargo
area and secure
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
with the wing bolt.
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
4. Remove the wheel stow rod from the left side of the
floor compartment.
To store the flat or spare tire and tools:
1. Place the wheel wrench into the bag.
2. Use the hook and loop fastener straps to secure
the bag to the fully collapsed jack.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Place the flat, or damaged tire, face down, on the
load floor with the threaded wheel stow rod sticking
up through the center hole of the wheel.
8. Install the nut onto the wheel stow rod and tighten.
9. Install the rear compartment storage panel/cover
in the middle position. See Rear Compartment
information.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can.
5. Screw the threaded wheel stow rod onto the spare
tire bracket. The final position of the wheel stow rod
must be turned to the farthest forward position.
6. Remove the cap, if your vehicle has one, from the
center of the load floor. Position the rod through the
hole. Replace the rear compartment load floor over
the wheel stow rod through the hole in the floor.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
Compact Spare Tire
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi
(420 kPa).
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails which can damage the tire,
wheel and other parts of the vehicle.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also
transfer color to the vehicle’s interior.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the glass
and/or cause damage to the rear window defogger.
When cleaning the glass on the vehicle, use only a
soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned
area gives any impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft
cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect leather may permanently change the appearance
and feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot
lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
{ CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on
the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be
covered by the warranty.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Finish Care
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or
a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn
or damaged.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because they could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving
on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium,
calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and
water after exposure.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Use only
approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
your vehicle’s engine code.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label
has the following information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and
the certificates of title and registration.
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Electrical System
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly
reduces the chance of circuit overload and fire caused
by electrical problems.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
The vehicle has an underhood fuse block and an
instrument panel fuse block.
To identify and check fuses, circuit breakers, and relays,
refer to the Fuse Usage Chart on the inside surface
of the fuse panel door.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
passenger side of the center console, to the left of the
glove box near the floor.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remove the console cover to access the fuse block.
Fuses
Usage
Sunroof, Inside Rear View Mirror,
Compass
1
2
3
4
Rear Seat Entertainment
Rear Wiper
Liftgate
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
19
Usage
5
6
7
8
Airbags
Ignition Switch
Heated Seats
20
Body Control Module
Driver Side Turn Signal
Door Locks
21
Communications Integration Module
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,
Dimmer
22
23
Automatic Occupant Sensing
Module
9
Interior Lights
10
11
12
13
14
Power Mirrors
Relays
RAP RLY
REAR DEFOG
RLY
Usage
Passenger Side Turn Signal
Amplifier
Retained Accessory Power Relay
Rear Defogger Relay
Steering Wheel Illumination
Infotainment
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
Climate Control System, Remote
Function Actuator
15
PWR WNDW Power Windows
PWR SEATS Power Seats
16
17
18
Canister Vent
Radio
EMPTY
Empty
Cluster
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
To remove the fuse block cover, release the rear of the
cover first, by unlocking both of the tabs in the back.
Then lift the cover off. Do not lift the front of the cover
until the tabs at the rear have been unlocked. To
reinstall, fit together the tabs located on the front of the
cover, and push down on the cover until the tabs on
the rear of the cover click into place.
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver side of the engine compartment.
more information on location.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
1
Usage
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1
2
3
Auxiliary Power
4
Rear HVAC
5
Spare
6
Sun Roof
7
Antilock Brake System
Air Conditioning Clutch
Driver Side Low-Beam
Daytime Running Lamp 2
Passenger Side High-Beam
Passenger Side Park Lamp
Horn
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Driver Side Park Lamp
Starter
Electronic Throttle Control, Engine
Control Module
16
17
18
19
20
21
Emission Device 1
Even Coils, Injectors
Odd Coils, Injectors
Emission Device 2
Spare
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
22
Usage
Powertrain Control Module, Ignition
Transmission
Fuses
39
Usage
Fuel Pump
Not Used
23
40
24
Mass Airflow Sensor
Airbag Display
41
All-Wheel Drive
25
42
Regulated Voltage Control
26
Spare
Passenger Side Trailer Stoplamp,
Turn Signal
43
27
Stoplamp
44
45
48
49
50
52
53
54
57
63
Spare
28
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Driver Side High-Beam
Battery Main 3
Front, Rear Washer
Rear Defogger
29
30
Antilock Brake System Motor
Battery Main 2
32
Spare
33
Engine Control Module, Battery
Daytime Running Lamps
Fog Lamps
Transmission Control Module,
Battery
34
35
36
Trailer Park Lamp
Front Wiper
Climate Control System Blower
Battery Main 1
Driver Side Trailer Stoplamp, Turn
Signal
Electric Power Steering
37
38
Spare
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
55
Usage
Crank
Fan 1
56
Passenger Side Trailer Stoplamp,
Turn Signal
58
59
Driver Side Trailer Stoplamp, Turn
Signal
When changing relays, observe the location of the
notch on the old relay. Install new relays with the notch
in the same location.
60
61
62
Fan 3
Fan 2
Relays
31
Usage
Fuel Pump
Ignition Main
Misc.
PLR
Usage
46
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
Fuse Puller
47
Powertrain
Spare
51
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
3.4L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
3.4L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
10.5 qt
11.0 qt
9.9 L
10.4 L
4.5 qt
5.5 qt
4.3 L
5.2 L
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Fuel Tank
Front-Wheel Drive
20.5 gal
16.6 gal
77.6 L
62.8 L
All-Wheel Drive
Transmission Fluid
Automatic 5-Speed AF33 Transmission
Automatic 6-Speed 6T70 Transmission
Wheel Nut Torque
4.1 qt
9.5 qt
3.9 L
9.0 L
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
0.060 in (1.52 mm)
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
3.4L V6
3.6L V6
F
7
Automatic
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to
keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain
the vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer
for details.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
{ CAUTION:
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You might drive very short distances only a few times
a week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do
errands, or in many other ways.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need
more frequent checks and replacements. So please
read the following and note how you drive. If you have
any questions on how to keep the vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer/retailer.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
To purchase service information, see Service
should be checked, when to check it, and what
can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in
good condition.
on page 5-6.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
page 6-13. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since
the last service. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System
on page 5-18 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
When the change engine oil light and/or CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message appears, certain services,
checks, and inspections are required. Required services
are described in the following for “Maintenance I” and
“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended that the
first service be Maintenance I, the second service be
Maintenance II, and then alternate Maintenance I and
Maintenance II thereafter. However, in some cases,
Maintenance II may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the change engine oil light and/or CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message displays, service is
required for the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced as
soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions,
the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service technicians who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
light/message displays within 10 months since the
vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light/message displays
10 months or more since the last service or if the
light/message has not come on at all for one year.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter.
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
on page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant, power steering fluid (3.6L V6 engine only), and windshield
washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).
3.6L V6 Engine Only: Check automatic transmission fluid level and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
(severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid
(normal service).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems
on page 1-73.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assemblies, secondary latches, pivots, spring anchor and
release pawl, hood and door hinges, rear folding seats,
and liftgate hinges. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean
cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not
stick or squeak.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts
or signs of wear. Visually check constant velocity
joints, rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks. With
3.4L V6 engine: Inspect electric power steering cables
for proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc. With
3.6L V6 engine: Inspect hydraulic power steering lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc.
(g) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
page 5-92 for more information.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure
test the cooling system and pressure cap.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
(j) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear.
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
(l) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change.
Engine Coolant Level Check
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23.
Owner Checks and Services
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,
dependability, and emission control performance. Your
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
page 5-59. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-66.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
dealer/retailer for service.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in P (Park).
{ CAUTION:
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
on page 2-30.
{ CAUTION:
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should
the vehicle begin to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and the transmission
in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle
is held by the parking brake only.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
Engine Oil
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-23.
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Hydraulic
Power Steering
System (3.6L
V6 engine only)
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
With 3.4L V6 engine: VERSATRAK®
Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12378514,
in Canada 88901045).
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Transfer Case
(Power
Transfer Unit)
With 3.6L V6 engine: SAE 75W-90
Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
5-speed
Automatic
Use only T-IV Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Transmission (GM Part No. U.S. 88900925, in
only)
6-speed
Automatic
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch,
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Transmission
(3.6L V6 engine
only)
Pivots, Spring meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hinges, Rear (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Folding Seat in Canada 10953474).
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Carrier
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Assembly — Axle Lubricant
Differential
(Rear Drive
Module)
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678).
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
22676970
A1627C
3.4L V6 Engine
25010792
89017524
15781507
PF47
PF48
3.6L V6 Engine
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
CF137
3.4L V6 Engine
12568387
12597464
41-101
41-990
3.6L V6 Engine
Wiper Blades
Front Driver Side – 24 in (60.0 cm)
Front Passenger Side – 19 in (47.5 cm)
Rear – 15.2 in (38.6 cm)
22703508
22703507
19120327
—
—
—
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
Customer Assistance and
Information
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, in the U.S., call the Pontiac Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-762-2737. In Canada, call General
Motors of Canada Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the general
manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Pontiac, remember that your concern
will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is
why we suggest you follow Step One first.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file
with the BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.
You can contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle
age, mileage and other factors. General Motors
reserves the right to change eligibility limitations
and/or discontinue its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after
following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware
of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration
Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts involved
by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
should be completed in approximately 70 days. We
believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools
and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/pontiac
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Online service and maintenance records
• Find Pontiac dealers for service nationwide
• Exclusive privileges and offers
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred GM
dealers/retailers.
• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
• Recall notices for your specific vehicle
• OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Pontiac − www.pontiac.com
Pontiac Merchandise — www.pontiacmall.com
Help Center — www.pontiac.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
• Contact Us
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canada — Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
communicate with Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT
(7668). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Customer Assistance Offices
Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail Pontiac, the letter should be addressed to:
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
United States — Customer Assistance
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.Pontiac.com
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma #2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
1-800-762-2737 or
1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
From Puerto Rico:
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-ROADSIDE
(762-3743); (Text telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY)
users, call 1-800-833-9935.
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility
Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
• Description of the problem
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Pontiac dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, or snow.
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever
comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Pontiac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or
driver if they decide the claims are made too often,
or the same type of claim is made many times.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental
expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty
period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and
rental car.
Services Provided
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock
the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock
may be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited
requires pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,
and a copy of the repair orders. Once authorization
has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements and explain how to
receive payment.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.
Propane and other fuels are not provided through
this service.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with
the most direct route or the most scenic route. There
is a limit of six requests per year. Additional travel
information is also available. Allow three weeks for
delivery.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while
you wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Shuttle Service
Courtesy Transportation
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may
also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
and public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement
of fuel or other transportation costs.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not
be available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered by
appropriate dealer personnel.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty
repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited and must
be supported by original receipts. This requires that you
sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state/
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine
GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that
your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and
safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts
can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage
is not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in
your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged
at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-7 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.
If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take
your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the
facility that any required replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts
or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts
will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer
or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation
based on that insurance company’s collision policy repair
limits, as you have no contractual limits with that
company. In such cases, you can have control of the
repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov;
or write to:
Call 1-800-762-2737, or write:
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Service Bulletins
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis
and service of your vehicle.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a
crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to
help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may
store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened
consumption or average speed. These modules may also
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of
the system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not
use or record personal information or link with any
other GM system containing personal information.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions for information on data collection
in this manual for more information.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-14
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-6
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel (cont.)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-19
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-27
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 3-34
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Safety Belts (cont.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service (cont.)
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-17
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
